WO2022022674A1 - Application icon layout method and related apparatus - Google Patents

Application icon layout method and related apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022022674A1
WO2022022674A1 PCT/CN2021/109524 CN2021109524W WO2022022674A1 WO 2022022674 A1 WO2022022674 A1 WO 2022022674A1 CN 2021109524 W CN2021109524 W CN 2021109524W WO 2022022674 A1 WO2022022674 A1 WO 2022022674A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
electronic device
desktop
application
information
icon
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/109524
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
秦磊
张乐乐
刘浩
卢曰万
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2022022674A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022022674A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/451Execution arrangements for user interfaces

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of electronic technologies, and in particular, to an application icon layout method and related devices.
  • the user needs to spend a long time searching for the icon of the application on the desktop because he is not familiar with the location of the icon of the application on the desktop of the new electronic device. In this way, the convenience of using the electronic device is reduced.
  • the present application discloses an application icon layout method and a related device.
  • the layout of the desktop icons can be performed according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. In this way, the user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device, thereby improving the convenience of using the electronic device.
  • the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: a first electronic device displays a first desktop, and a second electronic device displays a second desktop; the second electronic device receives a first user operation; The first user operation, the second electronic device sends a first broadcast; the first electronic device receives a second user operation; in response to the second user operation, the first electronic device discovers the second electronic device through the first broadcast device, and send the first information to the second electronic device; wherein, the first information carries the desktop layout information of the first desktop and the location information of the application icon on the first desktop; the second electronic device according to the first desktop The information resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • the positions of the icons of various applications on the first electronic device on the desktop of the device are familiar to the user.
  • the user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the first electronic device.
  • the positions of the icons of each application on the second electronic device on the desktop of the device are unfamiliar to the user.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: a second electronic device displays a second desktop; the second electronic device receives a first user operation; in response to the first user operation, the The second electronic device sends a first broadcast; the first broadcast is used by the first electronic device to discover the second electronic device; the second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device, and the first information carries the The desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the location information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device; the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device. The location of the second desktop.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • the maximum number of icons accommodated on each page may refer to the maximum number of icons accommodated in the application icon area.
  • the location of the application icon on the desktop refers to the row and column where the application icon is located in the application icon area and navigation bar. Among them, the row is counted from top to bottom, and the column is counted from left to right.
  • the first information is not limited to carrying the location information of the application icon on the desktop, and may also carry the location information of the control on the desktop.
  • the first electronic device may send the first information carrying the position information of the control on the desktop to the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device may layout the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information, and layout the corresponding controls according to the first information. After the controls are laid out, the positions of the corresponding controls on the second electronic device on the desktop or the pull-down menu bar are the same as those on the first electronic device.
  • the controls may include widgets and various functional controls on the negative screen, such as payment code controls, taxi controls, logistics information display controls, and air ticket display controls. Controls can also include functional controls on the Control Center, such as Wi-Fi switches, Bluetooth switches, music components, and more.
  • the first information may be obtained by encoding the first electronic device in an XML encoding manner.
  • the second electronic device can obtain desktop layout and application icon location information through XML decoding, and can also obtain folder information.
  • the folder information may include information such as the folder name, the application icon contained in the folder, the location of the folder on the desktop, and the location of the application icon in the folder.
  • the desktop icon position may include the position of the application icon in the navigation bar and the position of the application icon in the non-navigation bar.
  • each application icon may be uniquely identified by the name of the application icon and the pattern data of the icon.
  • multiple Notepad apps have the same app name as "Notepad”.
  • the icon patterns of the multiple notepad applications are different, and the first electronic device can identify the icon of the application by using the application name "notepad” and the data of the icon pattern of the application.
  • the second electronic device may also determine the application icon of the same application through the data of the application name and the application icon.
  • the second electronic device can send a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast.
  • the Bluetooth broadcast and the Wi-Fi broadcast may carry the MAC address and device identification of the second electronic device (the device identification is, for example, Lisa's mobile phone).
  • the first electronic device searches, it can receive the Bluetooth broadcast or Wi-Fi broadcast sent by the second electronic device, that is, search for (discover) the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device may display the device identification of the second electronic device according to the received broadcast of the second electronic device.
  • the user can touch the device identification, and in response to the user operation acting on the device identification, the first electronic device sends first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device.
  • the first broadcast is a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast
  • the first information is sent by the first electronic device to the second electronic device through a wireless local area network (WLAN) direct connection or a Bluetooth connection. equipment.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the first user operation is a user operation to turn on the Bluetooth switch of the second electronic device or a user operation to turn on the Wi-Fi switch of the second electronic device; the second user operation for turning on one or more of the Wi-Fi module and the Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
  • the first information when the desktop of the first electronic device includes multiple pages, the first information may further carry information of the page where each application icon is located.
  • the second electronic device after the second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets The application icon is before the position of the second desktop, and the method further includes: displaying, on the second electronic device, a first user interface, the first user interface including a first control and a first prompt; the first prompt indicates that the first user interface is received. information; the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop according to the first information, including: in response to a user operation acting on the first control, the first The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  • the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, including: the second electronic device according to the first information.
  • the icon of the first application is set in the first position of the two desktops; wherein, the icon of the first application on the first electronic device is also in the first position of the first desktop, the first An application is an application installed on both the first electronic device and the second electronic device; when the second application on the second electronic device is reset, the moving distance on the second desktop is the smallest, and the second application is the first application An application is installed on one electronic device but not installed on the second electronic device.
  • the first information also carries folder information
  • the folder information includes the location of the first folder on the first desktop
  • the first folder includes the first icon and the first Two icons, the position of the first icon in the first folder, and the position of the second icon in the first folder.
  • the desktop of the second electronic device may also include three pages. However, since no application icons are distributed on the two pages on the left, the desktop of the second electronic device may also include only one page.
  • the position of each application icon is the same as the position of the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the application icon of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the position of the application icon of the AI speaker on the first electronic device. That is, the icon of the AI speaker on the first electronic device is also located in the first row and the second column.
  • the application icon of the gallery is located in the 3rd row and the 2nd column, which is the same as the position of the icon of the gallery application on the first electronic device.
  • the settings application icons similarly, on the desktop of the second electronic device, the settings application icons, Huawei wear application icons, browser application icons, mailbox application icons, music application icons, memo application icons, heart health
  • the location of the researched application icon and the application icon of the application store is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the position of the application icon in the navigation bar of the desktop of the second electronic device is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the camera application icon, the dialing application icon, the information application icon, and the contact application icon are respectively located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the fourth column of the navigation bar on the desktop of the second electronic device. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the desktop navigation bar of the first electronic device.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device according to the user operation.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: a first electronic device displays a first desktop; the first electronic device receives a second user operation; in response to the second user operation, the The first electronic device discovers the second electronic device, and sends the first information to the second electronic device; wherein, the first information carries the desktop layout information of the first desktop and the position information of the application icon on the first desktop; The first information is used by the second electronic device to reset the desktop layout of the desktop of the second electronic device and to set the position of the application icon on the desktop of the second electronic device according to the first information.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • the first information is sent from the first electronic device to the second electronic device through a wireless local area network (WLAN) direct connection or a Bluetooth connection.
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • the second user operates to turn on one or more of a Wi-Fi module and a Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, wherein the method includes: a second electronic device displays a second desktop; the second electronic device receives an NFC module for enabling a short-range wireless communication technology The second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device through the NFC module, and the first information carries the desktop layout information and application icons of the desktop of the first electronic device on the first electronic device. The position information of the desktop; the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: the second electronic device displays a second desktop; in response to the second electronic device logging in to a first account, the second electronic device displays a first Two user interfaces; wherein, the first electronic device of the second electronic device is also logged in with the first account; the second user interface includes a second control; in response to a user operation acting on the second control, the second electronic device The first information is received from the first electronic device through the mobile communication technology, and the first information carries the desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device; the second electronic device The device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  • the application icon layout method further includes: the first electronic device displays a first desktop, and the second electronic device displays a second desktop; the first electronic device receives a third user operation; According to the third user operation, the second electronic device detects whether shaking is performed. The first electronic device may also detect whether shaking has been performed. When both the first electronic device and the second electronic device are shaken, the first electronic device may carry the first information of the desktop layout information and the position information of the application icon and send it to the second electronic device. The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop according to the first information.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device may determine whether shaking is performed through the data detected by the acceleration sensor.
  • the first electronic device may also transmit the first information to the second electronic device by using a mobile communication technology and a WAN technology through an instant communication application (such as WeChat, QQ and other applications).
  • an instant communication application such as WeChat, QQ and other applications.
  • the first electronic device may transmit the first information to the second electronic device through a mobile communication technology or a WAN technology.
  • the layout of the desktop icons can be performed according to the first information according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a second electronic device, where the second electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, a Bluetooth module, and a Wi-Fi module; the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module are used for for sending the first broadcast and establishing a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection with the first electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, and the memory is used for storing computer program code; the computer program code includes computer instructions, The one or more processors invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute the application icon layout method provided by the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, the electronic device is a first electronic device, and the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, a Bluetooth module, and a Wi-Fi module; the Bluetooth a module and a Wi-Fi module for discovering the second electronic device through the first broadcast and establishing a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection with the second electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the The memory is used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions; when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device causes the electronic device to execute the application icon provided in the third aspect layout method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, the electronic device is a second electronic device, and the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, and an NFC module; the NFC module is used for receiving first information sent by the first electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory is used to store computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions; when the one or more processors When each processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes the application icon layout method provided in the fourth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, the electronic device is a second electronic device, and the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, and a mobile communication module; the mobile communication module, for receiving the first information sent by the first electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory is used for storing computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions; when the one When the computer instructions are executed by the or multiple processors, the electronic device executes the application icon layout method provided in the fifth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, the chip is applied to a second electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are configured to invoke computer instructions to cause the second electronic device to perform as described in Section 1.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, the chip is applied to a first electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are used for invoking computer instructions to cause the first electronic device to execute such as The third aspect and the method described in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which is applied to a second electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are configured to invoke computer instructions to cause the second electronic device to execute the following The method described in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions, when the computer program product is executed on a second electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform any one of the second aspect and the second aspect. implementation of the method described.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product including instructions, when the computer program product is executed on a first electronic device, the first electronic device is made to execute any one of the third aspect and the third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions, when the computer program product is executed on a second electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method described in the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the above-mentioned instructions are executed on a second electronic device, the above-mentioned second electronic device is made to execute any one of the second aspect and the second aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the above-mentioned instructions are executed on a first electronic device, the above-mentioned first electronic device is made to execute any one of the third aspect and the third aspect. A possible implementation of the method described.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the above-mentioned instructions are executed on a second electronic device, the above-mentioned second electronic device is caused to execute the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect. method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes a first electronic device and a second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device are used to perform the method described in the first aspect.
  • the second electronic device provided in the sixth aspect, the electronic device provided in the seventh aspect, the electronic device provided in the eighth aspect, the electronic device provided in the ninth aspect, the chip provided in the tenth aspect, and the eleventh aspect The chip provided, the chip provided by the twelfth aspect, the computer program product provided by the thirteenth aspect, the computer program product provided by the fourteenth aspect, the computer program product provided by the fifteenth aspect, and the computer storage provided by the sixteenth aspect
  • the medium, the computer storage medium provided in the seventeenth aspect, the computer storage medium provided in the eighteenth aspect, and the system provided in the nineteenth aspect are all used to execute the method provided by the embodiments of the present application. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, reference may be made to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 30 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device 30 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 5A to 5D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIGS. 11A to 11C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of an application icon layout method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the application scenarios involved in the embodiments of the present application are introduced.
  • the user may be unfamiliar with the layout of application icons on the desktop of the electronic device and the positions of each application icon.
  • the user is familiar with the location on the desktop of the icon applied on one electronic device, and is familiar with the location on the desktop of the icon applied on the other electronic device.
  • the location may be unfamiliar.
  • the user needs to spend a long time searching for the icon of the application on the desktop, which reduces the convenience of using the electronic device.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an application icon layout method and related apparatuses.
  • the positions of the icons of each application on the first electronic device on the device desktop are familiar to the user. The user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the first electronic device. The positions of the icons of each application on the second electronic device on the desktop of the device are unfamiliar to the user.
  • the first electronic device may transmit data to the second electronic device through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), and near field communication (NFC).
  • the data is, for example, the first information that carries desktop layout information and application icon location information.
  • the first electronic device may also transmit data to the second electronic device through cellular mobile communication technologies such as 3G, LTE, 5G, or a wide area network (wide area network, WAN) technology.
  • the first electronic device may send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the second electronic device in response to the user operation.
  • the second electronic device may receive the first information, and lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1 , the system includes a first electronic device 10 and a second electronic device 20 . in:
  • the positions of the icons of each application on the first electronic device 10 on the desktop of the device are familiar to the user. The user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the first electronic device.
  • the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 can transmit data, and specifically, the data can be transmitted through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and NFC.
  • the first electronic device 10 may utilize huawei share (implemented by the ultra-fast sharing control hereinafter) to realize the transmission of data from the first electronic device 10 to the second electronic device 20 .
  • both the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module in the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are turned on.
  • the first electronic device 10 can scan and discover the second electronic device 20 by using the Bluetooth module.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display the scanned device identification of the second electronic device.
  • the first electronic device 10 may transmit data to the second electronic device 20 through the WLAN direct connection.
  • the data is, for example, the first information that carries desktop layout information and application icon location information.
  • the first electronic device 10 can transmit data to the second electronic device 20 by using bluetooth low energy (BLE) and/or classic Bluetooth BR/EDR (Basic Rate/Enhanced Data Rate) technology.
  • BLE bluetooth low energy
  • BR/EDR Basic Rate/Enhanced Data Rate
  • the Bluetooth technology utilized in the embodiments of the present application may include different versions of Bluetooth protocols, such as Bluetooth versions 1.0, 1.2, 2.0+EDR, 3.0+HS, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, and 5.0.
  • the Wi-Fi technology is, for example, WLAN direct connection.
  • the first electronic device 10 may transmit the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the second electronic device 20 through the WLAN direct connection.
  • the WLAN Direct technology enables data to be directly transmitted between the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 without going through a wireless access point.
  • the first electronic device 10 can also transmit the first information to the second electronic device 20 through other Wi-Fi technologies, for example, through the first electronic device 10 via a Wi-Fi access point Data is transmitted to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the NFC module in the first electronic device and the NFC module in the second electronic device may work in a peer-to-peer (peertopeer, P2P) mode.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device can transmit data.
  • the first electronic device 10 may also transmit data to the second electronic device 20 through cellular mobile communication technologies such as 3G, LTE, 5G, or WAN technologies.
  • cellular mobile communication technologies such as 3G, LTE, 5G, or WAN technologies.
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 have the same desktop layout, and the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in the same position on the desktop.
  • both the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 may be a mobile phone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a personal computer, or the like.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 30 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 30 shown in FIG. 2 is only an example, and the electronic device 30 may have more or fewer components than those shown in FIG. 2, two or more components may be combined, or Different component configurations are possible.
  • the various components shown in the figures may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
  • the electronic device 30 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charge management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2.
  • Mobile communication module 150 wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, And a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and so on.
  • SIM subscriber identification module
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structures illustrated in the embodiments of the present invention do not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 30 .
  • the electronic device 30 may include more or less components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components.
  • the illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processor
  • graphics processor graphics processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller memory
  • video codec digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • NPU neural-network processing unit
  • the controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 30 .
  • the controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • a memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • the interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous transmitter) receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous transceiver
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus that includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL).
  • the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate with each other through the I2C bus interface, so as to realize the touch function of the electronic device 30 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 110 with the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through a CSI interface to implement the photographing function of the electronic device 30 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 30 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured by software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and the like.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that conforms to the USB standard specification, and may specifically be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 30, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 30 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones.
  • the interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
  • the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 30 .
  • the electronic device 30 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 30 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
  • the power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 and supplies power to the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance).
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 30 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 30 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization.
  • the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 30 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
  • the modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the low frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and passed to the application processor.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 194 .
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device.
  • the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110, and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 30 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as Wi-Fi networks), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellite system (GNSS) ), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • BT Bluetooth
  • GNSS global navigation satellite system
  • FM frequency modulation
  • NFC near field communication
  • IR infrared technology
  • IR infrared technology
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2 .
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 30 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 30 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Time Division Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • global positioning system global positioning system, GPS
  • global navigation satellite system global navigation satellite system, GLONASS
  • Beidou navigation satellite system beidou navigation satellite system, BDS
  • quasi-zenith satellite system quadsi -zenith satellite system, QZSS
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the wireless communication module and the mobile communication module in the first electronic device 10 may be used to send the first information carrying the layout information of the desktop and the position information of the application icon on the desktop.
  • the second electronic device 20 can receive the first information through its own wireless communication module and mobile communication module.
  • the electronic device 30 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • Display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like.
  • Display screen 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light).
  • LED diode AMOLED
  • flexible light-emitting diode flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) and so on.
  • the electronic device 30 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the electronic device 30 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193, the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 .
  • the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera photosensitive element through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera photosensitive element transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye.
  • ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin tone.
  • ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene.
  • the ISP may be provided in the camera 193 .
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object is projected through the lens to generate an optical image onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • the ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals.
  • the electronic device 30 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • a digital signal processor is used to process digital signals, in addition to processing digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 30 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy, and the like.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • Electronic device 30 may support one or more video codecs.
  • the electronic device 30 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • MPEG2 moving picture experts group
  • MPEG3 MPEG4
  • MPEG4 moving picture experts group
  • the NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor.
  • NN neural-network
  • Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 30 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 30 .
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 30 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 .
  • the internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like.
  • the storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 30 and the like.
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
  • the electronic device 30 may implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone jack 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also referred to as a "speaker" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • Electronic device 30 may listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • the receiver 170B also referred to as "earpiece" is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the voice can be answered by placing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • the microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals.
  • the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through a human mouth, and input the sound signal into the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 30 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 30 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which may implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device 30 may further be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions.
  • the earphone jack 170D is used to connect wired earphones.
  • the earphone interface 170D can be the USB interface 130, or can be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals, and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194 .
  • the capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes.
  • the electronic device 30 determines the intensity of the pressure from the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 30 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A.
  • the electronic device 30 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation whose intensity is less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction for viewing the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion attitude of the electronic device 30 .
  • the angular velocity of electronic device 30 about three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization.
  • the gyroscope sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 30, calculates the distance to be compensated by the lens module according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device 30 through reverse motion to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenarios.
  • the air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure.
  • the electronic device 30 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist in positioning and navigation.
  • the magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 30 can detect the opening and closing of the flip holster using the magnetic sensor 180D.
  • the electronic device 30 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Further, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 30 in various directions (generally three axes).
  • the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 30 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
  • the electronic device 30 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 30 can use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes.
  • the light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes.
  • the electronic device 30 emits infrared light to the outside through light emitting diodes.
  • Electronic device 30 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 30 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 30 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 30 .
  • the electronic device 30 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 30 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 30 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 30 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
  • the fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 30 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, accessing application locks, taking photos with fingerprints, answering incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
  • the temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature.
  • the electronic device 30 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 30 may reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection.
  • the electronic device 30 when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 30 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 30 due to the low temperature.
  • the electronic device 30 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also called “touch panel”.
  • the touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194 , and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event.
  • Visual output related to touch operations may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 30 , which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the pulse of the human body and receive the blood pressure beating signal.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibration bone block obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the function of heart rate detection.
  • the keys 190 include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key.
  • the electronic device 30 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 30 .
  • Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations acting on different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations on different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
  • the indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 30 by inserting into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 30 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card and so on. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 30 interacts with the network through the SIM card to realize functions such as call and data communication.
  • the electronic device 30 employs an eSIM, ie: an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 30 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 30 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 30 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • the embodiment of the present invention takes an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 30 as an example.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device 30 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate with each other through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers, which are, from top to bottom, an application layer, an application framework layer, an Android runtime (Android runtime) and a system library, and a kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, video, system application, short message, and desktop.
  • applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, video, system application, short message, and desktop.
  • the application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer.
  • the application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer may include window managers, content providers, view systems, telephony managers, resource managers, notification managers, and the like.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, take screenshots, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make these data accessible to applications.
  • the data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone book, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. View systems can be used to build applications.
  • a display interface can consist of one or more views.
  • the display interface including the short message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • the phone manager is used to provide the communication function of the electronic device 30 .
  • the management of call status including connecting, hanging up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localization strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files and so on.
  • the notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can disappear automatically after a brief pause without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also display notifications in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of graphs or scroll bar text, such as notifications of applications running in the background, and notifications on the screen in the form of dialog windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a prompt sound is issued, the electronic device vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and a virtual machine. Android runtime is responsible for scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library consists of two parts: one is the function functions that the java language needs to call, and the other is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, safety and exception management, and garbage collection.
  • a system library can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
  • surface manager surface manager
  • media library Media Libraries
  • 3D graphics processing library eg: OpenGL ES
  • 2D graphics engine eg: SGL
  • the Surface Manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides a fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
  • 2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, and sensor drivers.
  • the system application of the first electronic device 10 may include an icon synchronization module.
  • the system application can obtain the layout of the desktop and the position of the application icon on the desktop from the desktop application.
  • the system application of the first electronic device 10 can sequentially transmit the layout of the desktop and the position of the application icon on the desktop to the kernel layer, and transmit the layout information carrying the desktop and the application icon through the communication module (mobile communication module or wireless communication module).
  • the first information of the location information on the desktop may include an icon synchronization module.
  • the second electronic device 20 receives the first information through the communication module, and transmits it to an upper-layer application, for example, to a system application of the second electronic device.
  • the icon synchronization function module of the system application adjusts the desktop layout in the desktop application and the position of the application on the desktop according to the first information, and after the adjustment, transmits the adjusted data to the kernel layer, and the kernel layer drives the display screen to display it.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the user interface 100 shown in FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the user interface of the desktop of the first electronic device 10 .
  • the user interface 100 may include: a status bar 101 , an application icon area 102 , a navigation bar 103 , and a page indicator 104 . in:
  • the status bar 101 may include: one or more signal strength indicators for mobile communication signals (also known as cellular signals), one or more signal strength indicators for Wi-Fi signals, a battery status indicator, and a time indicator.
  • the application icon area 102 may contain one or more application icons.
  • application icon 1021 of smart home application icon 1022 of AI speaker
  • application icon 1023 of memo application icon 1024 of computer
  • application icon 1025 of application store application icon 1026 of music
  • application icon 1027 of browser heart health research
  • the application icon 1028 of the mailbox the application icon 1029 of the mailbox, the application icon 1030 of the gallery, the application icon 1031 of the settings, and the application icon 1032 of the Huawei Wear.
  • the navigation bar 103 may also contain one or more application icons, such as an application icon 1031 for camera, an application icon 1032 for dialing, an application icon 1033 for information, and an application icon 1034 for contacts.
  • application icons such as an application icon 1031 for camera, an application icon 1032 for dialing, an application icon 1033 for information, and an application icon 1034 for contacts.
  • the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may include multiple pages, and application icons may be distributed on the multiple pages. Users can swipe left and right to browse application icons in other pages.
  • the page indicator 104 may be used to indicate which page the user is currently viewing. For example, as shown in FIG. 4 , the page indicator 104 indicates that the currently browsed page is the rightmost page, and the user can swipe left to make the first electronic device 10 switch to display the other two left pages.
  • the navigation bar 103 may not move. That is to say, when multiple pages are switched, the application icons in the application icon area 102 are changed.
  • the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may further include a calendar indicator, which may be used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, and the like.
  • the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may further include a weather indicator, which may be used to indicate the weather type, such as cloudy to sunny, light rain, etc., and may also be used to indicate information such as temperature.
  • the maximum number of icons accommodated on each page may refer to the maximum number of icons accommodated in the application icon area 102 .
  • the location of the application icon on the desktop refers to the row and column where the application icon is located on the page. Among them, the row is counted from top to bottom, and the column is counted from left to right.
  • the application icon 1021 of the smart home is in the first row and the first column of the user interface 100 of the desktop.
  • the application icon 1022 of the AI speaker, the application icon 1023 of the memo, and the application icon 1024 of the computer are respectively located in the first row, the second column, the first row and the third column, and the first row and the fourth column of the user interface of the desktop.
  • the application icon 1025 of the application store, the application icon 1026 of the music, the application icon 1027 of the browser, and the application icon 1028 of the heart health research are respectively located in the second row, the first column, the second row and the second column of the user interface of the desktop. 2nd row 3rd column, 2nd row 4th column.
  • the application icon 1029 of the mailbox, the application icon 1030 of the gallery, the application icon 1031 of the settings, and the application icon 1032 of the Huawei Wear are respectively located in the third row, the first column, the third row, the second column, and the third row of the user interface of the desktop.
  • the application icon 1031 of the camera, the application icon 1032 of dialing, the application icon 1033 of the message, and the application icon 1034 of the contact are located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the third column of the navigation bar 103 of the user interface of the desktop, respectively. 4 columns.
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information, and lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the desktop layout on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 is the same, and the icon of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 is in the same position on the desktop.
  • the location of the application icon may include the location on the desktop of the application icon 102 and the location on the navigation bar 103 of the application installed on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the first information is not limited to carrying the location information of the application icon on the desktop, and may also carry the location information of the control on the desktop.
  • the controls may include widgets, such as calendar widgets (used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, etc.), weather widgets (used to indicate weather types, such as cloudy to sunny, light rain, etc. , can also be used to indicate temperature and other information, and can also be used to indicate location), memo widget (used to display recent memo information).
  • calendar widgets used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, etc.
  • weather widgets used to indicate weather types, such as cloudy to sunny, light rain, etc. , can also be used to indicate temperature and other information, and can also be used to indicate location
  • memo widget used to display recent memo information.
  • the control may also include a negative screen, which refers to the screen on the left side of the desktop of the device for displaying information.
  • the controls also include various functional controls on the negative screen, such as payment code controls, taxi controls, logistics information display controls, and air ticket display controls.
  • the controls may also include functional controls on the control center, such as a Wi-Fi switch, a Bluetooth switch, a music component (including a start switch, a next track switch, etc.), a camera switch, and the like.
  • the controls may also include various function switches on the drop-down menu bar, such as Wi-Fi switch, Bluetooth switch, brightness adjustment control, mode switching control (eg, switching between ringer mode, vibrate mode, and silent mode). Controls can also contain cards that implement various functions.
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying the position information of the above control on the desktop to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may layout the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information, and layout the corresponding controls according to the first information. After the controls are laid out, the positions of the corresponding controls on the second electronic device 20 on the desktop or the pull-down menu bar are the same as those on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the first information may also carry position information of other controls on the desktop, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first electronic device 10 can send the information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the second electronic device 20 through short-range wireless communication or a mobile communication network.
  • first information The following describes the user interfaces involved in the following cases: (1) Sending first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through one or more technologies of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi. (2) Sending the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon by using the NFC technology. (3) Sending the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology.
  • FIGS. 5A to 5D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 5A shows that the user interface 30 is a setting interface on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the first electronic device 30 may display the user interface 300 in response to a user operation acting on the application icon set on the user interface 100 shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the user interface 30 may also be a next-level user interface of the set user interface, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • user interface 300 may include desktop layout options 301 , lock layout controls 302 , auto-align controls 303 , smart assistant controls 304 , and desktop synchronization controls 305 .
  • User interface 300 may also include a return control 306 . in:
  • the return control 306 is used to return to the previous interface.
  • the desktop layout option 301 is used to set the desktop layout of the first electronic device 10.
  • the desktop layout includes, for example, 4 ⁇ 6, indicating that application icons in 4 rows and 6 columns can be laid out on one page of the desktop.
  • the desktop layout may also include 5 ⁇ 5 and 5 ⁇ 6. 5 ⁇ 5 means that 5 rows and 5 columns of application icons can be laid out on one page of the desktop, and 5 ⁇ 6 means that 5 rows and 6 columns of application icons can be laid out on one page of the desktop .
  • the lock layout control 302 is used to lock the layout of the current desktop and the position of the application icon on the first electronic device 10 . After the layout of the desktop and the location of the application icons are locked, the application icons on the desktop cannot be moved or deleted, and the corresponding applications cannot be uninstalled.
  • the smart assistant control 304 is used to enable the display on the leftmost screen of the desktop of the first electronic device 10 . After opening, the first electronic device 10 can display express information, exercise steps information, search box, etc. on the leftmost screen.
  • the desktop synchronization control 305 is used for synchronizing the position of the application icon and the desktop layout across devices.
  • the desktop synchronization control 305 may include an on state and an off state.
  • the first electronic device 10 may switch the desktop synchronization control 305 between an on state and an off state on the user interface 300 .
  • the desktop synchronization control 305 is in a closed state, and in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 , the first electronic device 10 may display the desktop synchronization control 305 in an open state on the user interface 300 .
  • the first electronic device 10 may further display a user interface 400 .
  • the user interface 400 may include a synchronization content selection area 401 and a synchronization method selection area 402 .
  • the synchronization content selection area 401 may include an application icon selection area 4012 and a select-all control 4011 .
  • the application icon selection area 4012 may include icons of applications installed on the first electronic device 10 . These app icons can have checked and unchecked states. The position on the desktop of the application icon in the selected state in the application icon selection area 4012 will be sent out.
  • the select all control 4011 may also contain a checked state and an unchecked state.
  • the application icons in the application icon selection area 4012 are all in the selected state.
  • the first electronic device 10 displays the select-all control 4011 from the selected state to the non-selected state, and the first electronic device 10 displays all the application icons in the application icon selection area 4012 from the selected state. The status is displayed as unchecked.
  • the first electronic device displays the unselected state of the application icon as the selected state.
  • the synchronization mode selection area 402 can be used to display multiple modes for sending the positions of the application icons on the desktop.
  • the synchronization method selection area 402 may include a speed sharing control 4021, a WeChat sharing control 4022, a QQ sharing control 4023, a Twitter sharing control 4024, a Facebook sharing control 4025, an email sharing control 4026, and a WLAN direct sharing control 4027, a memo sharing control 4028, and a Bluetooth sharing control 4029.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display more sharing controls. in:
  • WeChat sharing control 4022, QQ sharing control 4023, Twitter sharing control 4024, Facebook sharing control 4025, Email sharing control 4026 which can be used to pass the corresponding communication applications (WeChat application, QQ application, Twitter application, Facebook application, Email application) application) sends the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout.
  • the memo sharing control 4028 can be used to record the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through the memo application, and can be transmitted to the cloud device or other terminal device through the memo application.
  • the Wi-Fi Direct sharing control 4027 can be used to share the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through Wi-Fi Direct.
  • the Bluetooth sharing control 4029 can be used to share the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through Bluetooth.
  • the speed sharing control 4021 can be used to share the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through a combination of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
  • the speed sharing control 4021 is used as an example to introduce below.
  • the Bluetooth sharing control 4029 is similar to the WLAN direct sharing control 4027 .
  • the speed sharing control 4021 can also prompt "Click here to turn on WLAN and Bluetooth, no traffic, speed sharing".
  • the first electronic device 10 can turn on the Wi-Fi switch when the Wi-Fi switch is turned off, and the first electronic device 10 can turn on the Bluetooth switch when the Bluetooth switch is turned off. After the Bluetooth switch and the Wi-Fi switch are turned on, the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module of the first electronic device 10 are in a working state.
  • the first electronic device 10 can search for peripheral devices through Bluetooth.
  • the user when the user wants to receive the location and desktop layout of the application icon sent by the first electronic device 10 through another device (for example, the second electronic device 20 ), the user can set the second electronic device 20 to The speed sharing switch is turned on.
  • the speed sharing switch of the second electronic device 20 After the speed sharing switch of the second electronic device 20 is turned on, the second electronic device 20 can send a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast.
  • the Bluetooth broadcast and the Wi-Fi broadcast can carry a media access control (media access control, MAC) address and a device identification (a device identification such as Lisa's mobile phone) of the second electronic device 20 .
  • the first electronic device 10 may receive the Bluetooth broadcast or Wi-Fi broadcast sent by the second electronic device 20 , that is, the second electronic device 20 is searched.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display the device identification of the second electronic device 20 according to the received broadcast of the second electronic device 20 .
  • the first electronic device 10 displays the device identification of the searched device.
  • the device identification of the searched device includes a device identification 403 and a device identification 404 .
  • Device identification 403 may prompt "display”.
  • Device identification 404 may prompt "Lisa's Cell Phone”.
  • the device identification 404 may be the device identification of the second electronic device 20 .
  • the user can touch the device identifier 404 to send the location and desktop layout of the application icon of the first electronic device 10 to the device corresponding to the device identifier 404 (ie, the second electronic device 20 ).
  • the first electronic device 10 sends the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the application icon position information to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information to the second electronic device 10 through the MAC address carried on the Bluetooth broadcast.
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information through the WLAN direct connection.
  • FIGS. 6A to 6D are schematic diagrams of user interfaces of some second electronic devices 20 provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • the user interface 200 shown in FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of the user interface of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 .
  • the user interface 200 on the second electronic device 20 may also include: a status bar 201 , an application icon area 202 , and a navigation bar 203 . in:
  • the application icon area 202 may include the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker, the application icon 2022 of the gallery, the application icon 2023 of the setting, the application icon 2024 of the Huawei wear, the application icon 2025 of the browser, the application icon 2026 of the mailbox, and the application icon 2027 of the music. , Memo's app icon 2028, Heart Health Research's app icon 2029, and App Store's app icon 2020.
  • the navigation bar 203 may contain one or more application icons, such as an application icon 2031 for information, an application icon 2032 for contacts, an application icon 2033 for camera, and an application icon 2034 for dialing.
  • application icons such as an application icon 2031 for information, an application icon 2032 for contacts, an application icon 2033 for camera, and an application icon 2034 for dialing.
  • the number of pages of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may be 1 page.
  • FIG. 6A only exemplarily shows the user interface of the second electronic device 20 , and should not constitute a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
  • the second electronic device 20 displays the user interface 500 shown in FIG. 6B .
  • the user interface 500 may include a plurality of switches, and the plurality of switches may include a WLAN switch, a Bluetooth switch, a flashlight switch, an automatic rotation switch, a screen capture switch, an airplane mode switch, a mobile data switch, a location information switch, a Eye mode switch, hotspot switch, screen recording switch, large screen projection switch, NFC switch 503, etc.
  • the user interface 500 may also include a speed sharing control 501 .
  • the second electronic device 20 can switch the speed sharing control 501 between an on state and an off state in response to a user operation acting on the speed sharing control 501 .
  • the speed sharing control 501 is in an off state, and in response to a user operation acting on the speed sharing control 501 , the second electronic device 20 switches the speed sharing control 501 from the off state to the on state.
  • the speed sharing control is turned on, the second electronic device 20 can send a Bluetooth broadcast to be searched by surrounding devices. Not limited to Bluetooth broadcast, the second electronic device 20 may also transmit Wi-Fi broadcast.
  • the embodiment of the present application uses the speed sharing switch as an example on the user interface 500, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the interface where the speed sharing switch is located.
  • the speed sharing switch can also be in the setting interface.
  • the Bluetooth broadcast and the Wi-Fi broadcast can carry the MAC address of the second electronic device 20 and the device identification (the device identification is, for example, Lisa's mobile phone).
  • the first electronic device 10 may receive the Bluetooth broadcast or Wi-Fi broadcast sent by the second electronic device 20 , that is, the second electronic device 20 is searched.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display the device identification of the second electronic device 20 according to the received broadcast of the second electronic device 20 .
  • the second electronic device 20 when the second electronic device 20 receives the first information from the first electronic device, the second electronic device 20 may display a prompt box 502 on the user interface 50 .
  • the first information may carry desktop layout information and application icon location information of the first electronic device.
  • prompt box 502 may include prompt 5021 , reject control 5022 and accept control 5023 . in:
  • Prompt 5021 may prompt "Desktop sync request received”.
  • the reject control 5022 can be used for the second electronic device 20 to reject the re-layout of the application icon on the desktop according to the received first information.
  • the accepting control 5023 is used for the second electronic device 20 to redo the layout of the application icons on the desktop according to the received first information.
  • This embodiment of the present application is not limited to displaying the prompt box 502 on the user interface 500 by the second electronic device 20 .
  • the prompt box can also be displayed on any user interface.
  • the second electronic device 20 displays any user interface, the second electronic device 20 can display the prompt box 502 according to the received first information.
  • the second electronic device 20 in response to a user operation acting on the accept control 5023, receives the first information, and lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the installed application icons are placed on the desktop according to the first information, as shown in FIG. 6D , the second electronic device 20 displays the desktop that has been rearranged by the user.
  • the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in the same position on the desktop.
  • the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may also include 3 pages. However, since no application icons are distributed on the two pages on the left, the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may also include only one page. After the rearrangement, on the page, the position of each application icon is the same as the position of the same application icon on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the location of the application icon 1022 is the same. That is, the icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 is also located in the first row and the second column.
  • the application icon 2022 of the gallery is located in the third row and the second column, which is the same as the location of the icon 1030 of the gallery application on the first electronic device 10.
  • the application icon 2028 of , the application icon 2029 of the heart health research, and the application icon 2020 of the application store are in the same location as the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the location of the application icon in the navigation bar 203 of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the application icon 2033 of the camera, the application icon 2034 of the dial, the application icon 2031 of the information, and the application icon 2032 of the contact are located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the third column of the navigation bar 203 on the desktop of the second electronic device, respectively. 4 columns. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the desktop navigation bar 103 of the first electronic device 10 .
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device 10 according to the user operation.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device 10 are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • the first electronic device may send the first information to the second electronic device 20 through the NFC technology.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the desktop synchronization control 305 is in a closed state, and in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305, the first electronic device 10 can On the interface 300, the desktop synchronization control 305 is displayed in an open state.
  • the first electronic device 10 may further display a user interface 600 .
  • the user interface 600 may include a prompt 601 , a help control 602 and a cancel control 603 .
  • the prompt 601 may prompt "Please turn on the NFC of the device whose desktop icon layout needs to be synchronized, and touch this device".
  • the first electronic device 10 in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 shown in (A) of FIG. 7 , the first electronic device 10 may turn on the NFC switch. After the NFC switch is turned on, the NFC module is turned on, and the first electronic device 10 can exchange data with another device through the NFC module. In other embodiments, the NFC switch on the first electronic device 10 needs to be manually turned on.
  • the NFC switch of the first electronic device 10 is similar to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the help control 602 can be used to prompt the specific operation process of turning on NFC and transmitting through NFC.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display a specific operation flow of turning on the NFC and transmitting through the NFC.
  • the cancel control 603 is used to cancel the transmission of the first message.
  • the user can manually turn on the NFC switch of the second electronic device 20 .
  • the NFC switch 503 on the second electronic device 20 may be in an off state, and in response to a user operation acting on the NFC switch 503 , the second electronic device 20 may switch the NFC switch 503 from the off state to display as On state.
  • the NFC switch 503 is in an on state
  • the NFC module on the second electronic device 20 is in a working state.
  • the second electronic device 20 can transmit data with other electronic devices (eg, the first electronic device 10 ) through the NFC module.
  • the second electronic device 20 can contact (ie, touch) the first electronic device 10 .
  • the first electronic device 10 can send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through NFC communication.
  • the second electronic device 20 may lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the desktop layout of the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are the same, and the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in The same position on the desktop.
  • the user interface 200 shown in (D) in FIG. 7 reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D , which will not be repeated here.
  • the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information may be sent on the user interface 300 (setting interface) in response to a user operation.
  • the first electronic device 10 or the second electronic device 20 A prompt interface can be displayed to prompt the user that desktop synchronization is possible (ie, the desktop layout can be adjusted by carrying the first information of the desktop layout information and the application icon position information).
  • the first electronic device 10 can send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon.
  • Example 1 Shake to transmit the first message
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the desktop synchronization control 305 is in a closed state, and in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305, the first electronic device 10 can On the interface 300, the desktop synchronization control 305 is displayed in an open state.
  • User interface 300 may be described with reference to FIG. 5A.
  • the first electronic device 10 may further display a user interface 700 .
  • the user interface 700 may include a prompt 701 , a help control 702 and a cancel control 703 .
  • the prompt 701 may prompt "Please shake this device and the device whose desktop icon layout needs to be synchronized".
  • the first electronic device 10 in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 shown in (A) in FIG. 8 , the first electronic device 10 may detect data through an acceleration sensor and determine the first electronic device according to the detected data. Whether the device 10 has been shaken.
  • the desktop synchronization control on the setting interface of the second electronic device 20 may also be in an enabled state.
  • the desktop synchronization control on the setting interface of the second electronic device 20 refers to the desktop synchronization control 305 on the user interface 30 of the first electronic device 10 .
  • the second electronic device 20 can also detect data through the acceleration sensor and determine whether the first electronic device 10 is shaken according to the detected data.
  • the help control 702 can be used to prompt a specific operation flow.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display a specific operation flow of the user operation to transmit the first message.
  • Cancel control 703 for canceling transmission of the first message.
  • the user can hold the two electronic devices Shake (ie shake).
  • the first electronic device 10 may determine that the first electronic device 10 is shaking through data detected by the acceleration sensor, and send a notification indicating that the first electronic device 10 is shaking to the server through the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology.
  • the server may also receive a notification indicating that the second electronic device 10 is shaking. Then the server can instruct the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 to transmit data, so that the first electronic device 10 can send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20.
  • the second electronic device 20 may lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. As shown in (D) of FIG. 8 , after the rearrangement is completed, the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in the same position on the desktop. Regarding the user interface 200 shown in (D) in FIG. 7 , reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D , which will not be repeated here.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display a prompt and an acceptance control.
  • the prompt may indicate that new desktop layout and icon location information has been received.
  • the second electronic device 20 executes the layout of the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the embodiment of the present application is introduced by taking the shaking scene to transmit the first message using cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology as an example, but it is not limited to cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology, and it can also be through short-range wireless communication (for example, one or more technologies of Bluetooth and WiFi) are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • Example 2 Transmission of the first information through communication software such as WeChat and QQ
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first electronic device 10 displays a user interface 400 , and the description of the user interface 400 may refer to the description of FIG. 5C .
  • the first electronic device 10 may display the user interface 704.
  • the user interface 704 is the user interface of the WeChat application.
  • the first electronic device 10 can log in to the first WeChat account.
  • the user interface 704 may include a search box 7041 and a contact list 7042 . in:
  • Search box 7041 which can be used to search for contacts.
  • Contact list 7041 may contain one or more contacts. As shown in (B) of FIG. 9 , the contact list 7041 may contain a file transfer assistant 70421 .
  • the first electronic device 10 can utilize the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology to transmit the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the device logging in the first WeChat account ( For example the second electronic device 20).
  • the first electronic device 10 may display the user interface 705.
  • the user interface 705 is a dialog interface of the WeChat application.
  • the user interface 705 may include a return control 7051 , a prompt 7052 indicating the first information, a dialog 7053 . in:
  • the return control 7051 is used to return to the previous interface of the user interface 705 .
  • Prompt 7052 indicating the first information.
  • a dialog box 7053 is used to input text messages, emoticon messages, etc.
  • the first electronic device 10 transmits the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the device (eg, the second electronic device 20 ) that logs in to the first WeChat account
  • the second electronic device 20 can be rearranged through the first information Desktop application icon.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second electronic device 20 can also log in to the first WeChat account.
  • the second electronic device 20 can display a dialog interface of the WeChat application, namely the user interface 706 .
  • the user interface 706 may include a return control 7061 , a prompt 7062 indicating the first information, a dialog 7063 . in:
  • the return control 7061 is used to return to the previous interface of the user interface 706 .
  • Prompt 7062 indicating the first information.
  • a dialog box 7063 is used to input text messages, emoticon messages, etc.
  • the second electronic device 20 displays the user interface 707 .
  • the user interface 707 includes a prompt 7071 , a cancel control 7072 and an accept control 7073 . in:
  • Prompt 7071 can prompt "Do you want to synchronize desktop layout and application icon position?".
  • Cancel control 7072 which can be used to cancel the application icons from rearranging the desktop.
  • the second electronic device 20 closes the user interface 707 and returns to the user interface 706 .
  • Accept control 7073 for the second electronic device 20 to lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information may only obtain the link indicating the first information.
  • the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information, and lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the second electronic device 20 rearranges the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information, the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are displayed on the desktop The positions are the same, and reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D , which will not be repeated here.
  • the server corresponding to the account may notify the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20.
  • the application icons on the desktop can be synchronized.
  • the first electronic device 10 may request the server to log in the Huawei account through the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology, and the server may verify the login request of the first electronic device 10. For example, the server may store the password corresponding to the account set by the user and pass the password verification. If the verification is passed, the first electronic device 10 logs in to the Huawei account.
  • the association relationship between the device information of the first electronic device 10 and the Huawei account can be stored on the server.
  • the cloud server may store the association relationship between the device information of the second electronic device 10 and the Huawei account.
  • the server can notify the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 through cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology, and can synchronize application icons on the desktop.
  • FIGS. 11A to 11C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display a user interface 800 .
  • User interface 800 may include prompt 801 , option control 802 , option control 803 , and cancel control 804 . in:
  • Prompt 801 which can prompt "It is detected that you are logged in to two devices at the same time, and the location of the application icon can be synchronized across devices”.
  • the option control 802 can be used to send the desktop layout of the first electronic device 10 and the position of the application icons on the desktop, so that the second electronic device 20 can rearrange the desktop icons.
  • the option control 803 can be used for the first electronic device 10 to receive the desktop layout and the position of the application icon on the desktop of another electronic device (eg, the second electronic device 20 ) under the same Huawei account, and re-layout the desktop icons.
  • the cancel control 804 is used to cancel the synchronization of the desktop icon layout between the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 .
  • the first electronic device 10 may close the user interface 800 .
  • the first electronic device 10 may send a request to the server through a cellular mobile communication technology or a WAN technology.
  • the server may notify the second electronic device 20 to send the information carrying the desktop layout information and the position information of the application icon on the desktop to the first electronic device 10 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may send the information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon on the desktop to the first electronic device through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, NFC, cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology .
  • the first electronic device 10 is not limited to requesting the desktop layout and the location of the application icon from the second electronic device 20 via the server through the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology.
  • the first electronic device 10 can also use Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or NFC in the One or more transmit data to the second. Specifically, taking Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as an example, in response to a user operation acting on the option control 803, the first electronic device 10 can turn on the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module, and send a Bluetooth broadcast.
  • the second electronic device 20 can also turn on the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display the device identification of the first electronic device 10 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may send information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon on the desktop to the first electronic device 10 through the WLAN direct connection.
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 via the server.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display a prompt box 805 , and the prompt box 805 may include a prompt 8051 , a reject control 8052 and an accept control 8053 . in:
  • Prompt 8051 may prompt "Desktop synchronization request received. After acceptance, the layout of the desktop icons of this device will be re-layout".
  • the reject control 8052 can be used for the second electronic device 20 to reject the re-layout of the application icon on the desktop according to the received first information.
  • the accepting control 8053 is used for the second electronic device 20 to redo the layout of the application icons on the desktop according to the received first information.
  • the second electronic device 20 In response to the user operation acting on the accept control 8053, the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the installed application icons are placed on the desktop according to the first information, as shown in FIG. 11C , the second electronic device 20 displays the desktop that has been rearranged by the user. For the desktop rearranged by the second electronic device 20, reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D, which will not be repeated here.
  • the first electronic device 10 may display a User interface 400 shown in 5C.
  • the first electronic device 10 may also send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through one or more of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
  • the first electronic device 10 when multiple devices log in to the same account (for example, a Huawei account) at the same time, in the user interface shown in FIG. 11A, in response to the user operation acting on the option control 802, the first electronic device 10 The user interface 600 shown in (B) of FIG. 7 may also be displayed. The first electronic device 10 may also send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through NFC.
  • the first electronic device 10 when multiple devices log in to the same account (for example, a Huawei account) at the same time, in the user interface shown in FIG. 11A, in response to the user operation acting on the option control 802, the first electronic device 10
  • the user interface 700 shown in (B) in FIG. 8 may also be displayed.
  • the first electronic device 10 may also send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through a cellular mobile communication technology or a WAN technology.
  • the second electronic device 20 when the second electronic device 20 successfully logs in to the Huawei account, the second electronic device 20 can display a user interface, which is analogous to the user interface 800 on the first electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 11A .
  • the second electronic device 20 may also receive a user operation acting on option 2 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology.
  • the first information carries desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display the prompt box 805 shown in FIG. 11B .
  • the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the embodiments of the present application are described by taking as an example that the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are both mobile phones, smart watches, tablet computers, personal computers and other devices.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 being the same type of device.
  • the first electronic device 10 is a mobile phone and the second electronic device 20 is a tablet computer as an example for illustration.
  • the desktop of the first electronic device 10 refers to the embodiment described in FIG. 4 . Please refer to FIG. 12.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display a desktop 806 .
  • the desktop 806 may include application icons 8061 for Huawei wear, application icons 8062 for heart health research, application icons 8063 for settings, application icons 8064 for gallery, application icons 8065 for mailboxes, application icons 8066 for browsers, and application icons 8067 for application stores , music application icon 8068, AI speaker application icon 8069, memo application icon 80610, QQ application icon 80611 and WeChat application icon 80612.
  • the application icon 8061 of Huawei Wear is located in the 1st row and 1st column of the desktop.
  • the Heart Health Research application icon 8062 is located on the desktop 806 in row 1 and column 2.
  • the set application icon 8063 is located in the first row and the third column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 8064 of the gallery is located in the first row and the fourth column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 8065 of the mailbox is located in the first row and the fifth column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 8066 of the browser is located in the second row and the first column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 8067 of the application store is located in the second row and the second column of the desktop 806 .
  • the music application icon 8068 is located in the second row and the third column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 8069 of the AI speaker is located in the second row and the fourth column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 80610 of the memo is located in the second row and the fifth column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 80611 of QQ is located in the 3rd row and 1st column of the desktop 806 .
  • the WeChat application icon 80612 is located in the third row and the second column of the desktop 806 .
  • the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 may also include a navigation bar 80613 .
  • the navigation bar 80613 may contain an application icon for dialing, an application icon for information, an application icon for contacts, and an application icon for camera.
  • the dial application icons, the message application icons, the contact application icons, and the camera application icons are located in the first, second, third, and fourth columns of the navigation bar 80613, respectively.
  • the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the second electronic device 20 .
  • the first electronic device 10 can send the first information to the second electronic device 20 through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and NFC, or can send the first information through a mobile communication technology or a WAN technology, Specific reference is made to the examples described in FIGS. 5A to 5D , 6A to 6D , 7 to 10 , and 11A to 11C .
  • the second electronic device 20 receives the first information, it can re-layout the desktop icons according to the first information.
  • the application icon 8069 of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the location of the application icon 1022 is the same. That is, the icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 is also located in the first row and the second column.
  • the application icon 80610 of the memo is located in the first row and the third column, which is the same as the application icon 1023 of the memo on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the application icon 8067 of the application store, the application icon 8068 of the music, the application icon 8066 of the browser, the application icon 806 of the heart health research, the application icon of the mailbox 8065 , the application icon 80642 of the gallery, the set application icon 8063 , and the application icon 8061 of Huawei Wear are in the same location as the same application icon on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the location of the application icon in the navigation bar 203 of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the application icon of the camera, the application icon of the dial, the application icon of the information, and the application icon of the contact are located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the fourth column of the navigation bar 80613 of the second electronic device desktop 806, respectively. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the desktop navigation bar 103 of the first electronic device 10 .
  • the first electronic device 10 may not include an application icon of QQ and an application icon of WeChat. That is, the first information may not include the location information of the application icon of QQ and the application icon of WeChat. Then the application icon 80611 of QQ and the application icon 80612 of WeChat on the second electronic device 20 can be located on the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 in the fourth row, the first column, and the fourth row, respectively, according to the principle of the minimum moving distance on the desktop 806. 2 columns.
  • the principle of the minimum moving distance please refer to the descriptions of FIGS. 15 to 17 .
  • FIG. 12 is only an example, and the second electronic device 20 is not limited to the application icon layout according to the example described in FIG. 12 .
  • the application icon 80611 of QQ may be located in the first row and the first column of the desktop 806 .
  • the application icon 80612 of WeChat may be located in the first row and the fourth column of the desktop 806 .
  • a plurality of application icons on the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may be located in one folder. Then, the first electronic device 10 can send the information that the multiple application icons are in the same folder and the location information of the folder on the desktop in the first information and send to the second electronic device 20 . When the multiple applications are also installed on the second electronic device 20, the second electronic device 20 may create a new folder according to the first information, place the multiple application icons in the folder, and place the folder on the desktop The same position as on the desktop of the first electronic device 10 .
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first electronic device 10 can display a desktop 105 .
  • Desktop 105 may contain an icon for Application 1, an icon for Application 2, an icon for Application 3, an icon for Application 4, an icon for Application 5, an icon for Application 6, an icon for Application 7, an icon for Application 8. These icons correspond to different apps.
  • Desktop 105 may also contain Folder 1, which may contain icons for application 9, icons for application 10.
  • the name of the folder 1 is “videos”.
  • the icon of application 1 , the icon of application 2 , the icon of application 3 , and the icon of application 4 are respectively located in the first to fourth columns of the first row of the desktop 105 .
  • the icon of application 5 , the icon of application 6 , the icon of application 7 , and the icon of application 8 are respectively located in the first to fourth columns of the second row of the desktop 105 .
  • Folder 1 is located at row 3, column 1 of desktop 105.
  • the application icon 9 is located in the first row and the first column of the folder 1
  • the application icon 10 is located in the first row and the second column of the folder 1.
  • Desktop 105 may also include a navigation bar 1051 .
  • the navigation bar 1051 may contain an icon for application 11 , an icon for application 12 , an icon for application 13 , an icon for application 14 .
  • the icon of application 11 , the icon of application 12 , the icon of application 13 , and the icon of application 14 are located in the first to fourth columns of the navigation bar 1051 , respectively.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display the desktop 204 .
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the desktop 204 may include the application icon of application 1, the icon of application 6, the folder 3 (including the icon of application 7 and the icon of application 8, named “Shopping”), application 9 , the icon of application 10, the icon of application 15.
  • Desktop 204 may also include a navigation bar 2041 .
  • the navigation bar 2041 may contain an icon of application 12, an icon of application 13, an icon of application 11, an icon of application 14.
  • the icon of the application 6 and the folder 3 are respectively located in the first and second columns of the first row of the desktop 204 .
  • the icon of application 9 , the icon of application 10 , the icon of application 15 , and the icon of application 1 are respectively located in the first to fourth columns of the second row of the desktop 204 .
  • the icon of application 12, the icon of application 13, the icon of application 11, and the icon of application 14 are located in the first to fourth columns of the navigation bar 2041, respectively.
  • the second electronic device 20 can reconfigure the desktop application icon layout according to the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the application icon position information.
  • the icon of the application 1 on the desktop 204 is located in the first row and the first column of the desktop 204 of the second electronic device.
  • the icon of the application 6, the icon of the application 7, and the icon of the application 8 are located in the second row, the second to the fourth column of the second electronic device 204, respectively. This is the same as the location of the same application icon of the first electronic device 10 .
  • folder 3 was deleted.
  • the second electronic device 20 may also create a folder 2 according to the first information, and place the icon of the application 9 and the icon of the application 10 in the folder 2 .
  • the name of the folder 2 in the second electronic device 20 is the same as the name of the folder 1 in the first electronic device 10, which is "video".
  • the location of the folder 2 on the desktop 204 is the same as the location of the folder 1 on the desktop 105 of the first electronic device 19 . That is, the folder 2 is in the 3rd row and 1st column of the desktop 204 .
  • the icon of the application 9 has the same location as the icon of the application 9 in the folder 1 of the first electronic device 10 , that is, the icon of the application 9 is in the first row and the first column of the folder 2 .
  • the icon of the application 10 in the folder 2 is in the same position as the icon of the application 10 in the folder 1 of the first electronic device 10 , that is, the icon of the application 10 is in the first row and the second column of the folder 2 .
  • the icon of application 11, the icon of application 12, the icon of application 13, and the icon of application 14 on the navigation bar 2041 of the second electronic device 20 are respectively located on the first page of the navigation bar 2041 of the desktop 204 of the second electronic device.
  • the first information may not include the icon location of the application 15 . That is, the application 15 is a non-common application of the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 .
  • the icon of the application 15 may be set in the first row and the third column of the desktop 204 of the second electronic device 20 according to the principle of the smallest moving distance.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device may contain folders with the same name.
  • the same-named folder contains one or more identical application icons.
  • the folder with the same name on the second electronic device is retained and set in the same position as the first electronic device, and the position of the same application icon in the folder with the same name is the same as the position of the corresponding application icon in the first electronic device.
  • the different application icons in the folder with the same name on the second electronic device and those on the first electronic device are moved out of the folder with the same name, and the different application icons are moved according to the principle of minimum moving distance.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device include folders with different names, but the folders with different names include the same application icon.
  • the folder with the different name on the second electronic device is moved to the same location as that on the first electronic device.
  • the position of the same application icon in the folder with the different name on the second electronic device is the same as that on the first electronic device.
  • the application icons in the folder with different names on the second electronic device that are different from those of the first electronic device are moved out of the folder and moved according to the principle of the minimum moving distance.
  • the first electronic device and the second electronic device include folders with the same name or different names, and the folders include the same application icon.
  • the folder with the same name or different name on the second electronic device can be moved to the same position as that on the first electronic device, and moved according to the principle of minimum moving distance.
  • the first information may not include the icon location of the application. That is, the application is a non-common application of the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may determine the position of each application icon by adopting the principle of minimum moving distance and the principle of minimum number of mobile application icons. It can be understood that the step counting rules involved in the moving distance in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain the embodiments of the present application, and should not be construed as limitations.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the desktop of the first electronic device 10 is the desktop 105 described with reference to FIG. 13 .
  • both the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are installed with application 1 , application 3 , application 4 , application 7 , application 8 , application 9 , application 10 , application 12 , and application 13.
  • the second electronic device 20 After receiving the first information, the second electronic device 20 determines the positions of the icons of these common applications on the desktop according to the first information.
  • the positions of the icons of these common applications on the desktop are the same as the positions of the icons of the corresponding applications on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the position of the icon of application 1 on the desktop 105 of the first electronic device 10 is the first row and the first column, then after re-laying the desktop icons, the desktop 204 of the second electronic device 20
  • the location of the icon on app 1 is also row 1, column 1.
  • the application 15 and the application 16 on the second electronic device 20 are non-common applications with the first electronic device 10 . That is, the application 15 and the application 16 are not installed on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the number of application icons moved on the desktop 204 is as small as possible, and the total distance of movement of the application icons is as small as possible.
  • the icons of the non-common application 16 are located in the first column of the navigation bar 2041 before the desktop icon layout is re-laid. After the rearrangement, the icon for application 16 is still in column 1 of the navigation bar 2041.
  • the icon of application 15 is located in row 2 and column 2 of desktop 204, moved 1 step.
  • the number of application icons moved on the desktop 204 is as small as possible (moving one application icon is the icon of the application 16 ), and the total distance moved by the application icons is as small as possible (moving one step).
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the application 15 and the application 17 on the second electronic device 20 are non-common applications.
  • the icons of the non-common application 15 are located in the second row and the third column of the desktop 204 before the desktop icon layout is redone.
  • the icon of application 15 is located in row 2 and column 3 of desktop 204, moved 1 step.
  • the icons of the non-common application 17 are located in the first row and the third column of the desktop 204 before the desktop icon layout is redone.
  • the icon of application 17 is located in row 1 and column 3 of desktop 204, moved 1 step.
  • the total distance that the app icon moves is as small as possible (2 steps).
  • the second electronic device 20 can set the icon of the application 9 on the third row and the first column of the desktop 204 , which is the same as the folder 1 on the first electronic device 10 .
  • Folder 1 contains icons for app 9.
  • the desktop of the first electronic device 10 and the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may both contain folders, for example, the desktop of the first electronic device 10 contains folder 3, and the desktop of the second electronic device 20 Contains folder 4.
  • the folder 3 and the folder 4 contain the same APP
  • the second electronic device 20 can adjust the folder 4 to the position of the folder 3 on the desktop according to the first information, and after the rearrangement, the application icons in the folder 4 are at Folder 3 also exists.
  • the second electronic device 20 can also adjust the name of the folder 4 to be the same as the name of the folder 3 .
  • folder 3 contains the icon of application 1 and the icon of application 2.
  • Folder 4 contains the icon of application 2 and the icon of application 3.
  • the folder 4 also contains the icon of the application 1 and the icon of the application 2, and the position of the folder 4 on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 and the position of the folder 3 on the first electronic device are also included.
  • the position on device 10 is the same.
  • the icon of the application 1 in the folder 5 on the second electronic device 20 needs to be removed from the folder 5 .
  • folder 5 may still contain multiple application icons.
  • the folder 5 can still exist, and the moving distance is minimal.
  • the moving distance of the icon on the second electronic device 20 refers to the distance that the same application icon moves on the desktop before and after the second electronic device 20 redoes the desktop icon layout.
  • the distance is in units of icon steps adjacent to the non-navigation bar area on the desktop. An example is given below.
  • the number of steps that the same application icon moves on the desktop checkerboard is the moving distance of the application icon.
  • each step of the application icon can only move up, down, left, and right adjacent application icon positions.
  • the application icon of application 1 moves from the second row and the fourth column to the first row and the first column, for a total of 4 steps.
  • the icon of application 15 moves from the 2nd row to the 3rd column to the 2nd row and 2nd column, a total of 1 step.
  • the total number of moving steps is the number of steps moved on a page according to the desktop checkerboard + 10. It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application takes adding 10 steps as an example, and is not limited to this value, and other values may also be added.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by this embodiment of the present application.
  • (A) in FIG. 17 is the desktop 204 before rearrangement according to the first information.
  • the desktop 204 may further include a page indicator 2042 indicating that the currently browsed page is the rightmost page, and the user can swipe left to make the second electronic device 20 Switch the display to the other two pages on the left.
  • the page indicator 2042 indicates that the icon of the application 15 is set on the middle page of the desktop. Move from position 1 to position 2 shown in (B) in FIG. 17 on one page according to the desktop checkerboard, that is, move 1 step. Position 1 is the position of the application 15 on a page before re-layout, that is, the second row and the third column of the desktop. Then the total number of moving steps is 11 (ie 1 step + 10 steps) steps.
  • the navigation bar 2041 and the desktop 204 in (A) in FIG. 17 may refer to the description in (A) in FIG. 16 , and will not be repeated here.
  • the total number of moving steps is the number of steps moved on a page according to the desktop checkerboard + 10.
  • the application icon of the navigation bar moves within the navigation bar by the number of steps moved by the desktop checkerboard.
  • the application icon is moved out of the folder, and the application icon counts the number of checkerboard moves starting from the location of the folder.
  • the total number of moving steps of the folder is the number of steps moved on a page according to the desktop checkerboard multiplied by 10.
  • the second electronic device 20 may determine the solution for moving the icons according to the "principle of the minimum number of mobile application icons and the principle of the minimum moving distance of the application icons". In this way, the calculation amount of the second electronic device 20 can be reduced, thereby reducing the occupation of the processor and the memory of the second electronic device 20 and improving the running speed of the device.
  • the second electronic device 20 may also use other algorithms to determine the solution for determining the moving icon.
  • the second electronic device 20 may also use the Hungarian algorithm, and the computational complexity is n 3 .
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of an application icon layout method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18 , the application icon layout method includes steps S101 to S105.
  • the first electronic device displays the first desktop
  • the second electronic device displays the second desktop.
  • the first desktop is, for example, the user interface shown in FIG. 4 and the user interface shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the second desktop is, for example, the user interface shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 12 , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 14 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 15 .
  • the user interface shown, the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 16 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 17 are examples of the user interface shown in FIG. 16 .
  • the second electronic device 20 receives a first user operation.
  • the first user operation is used for other electronic devices (eg, the first electronic device 10 ) to discover the second electronic device 20 .
  • the first user operation may be a user operation performed by the user interface shown in FIG. 6B acting on the speed sharing control 501 .
  • the first user operation is a user operation of turning on the Bluetooth switch of the second electronic device or a user operation of turning on the Wi-Fi switch of the second electronic device.
  • the second electronic device 20 sends the first broadcast.
  • the first broadcast may be a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast.
  • the first broadcast may also be another type of broadcast, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the first electronic device 10 receives a second user operation.
  • the second user operation is used to discover the second electronic device 20 .
  • the second user operation may include a user operation performed on the speed sharing control 4021 and a user operation performed on the device identifier 404 on the user interface shown in FIG. 5C to FIG. 5D .
  • the second user operation is used to turn on one or more of the Wi-Fi module and the Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
  • the first electronic device 10 sends the first information to the second electronic device 20.
  • the first information carries desktop layout information and application icon location information.
  • the first information may also carry folder information and folder location information.
  • the first information may be obtained by encoding the first electronic device 10 through an extensible markup language (extensible markup language, XML) encoding manner.
  • the second electronic device 20 can obtain desktop layout and application icon location information through XML decoding, and can also obtain folder information.
  • the folder information may include information such as the folder name, the application icon contained in the folder, the location of the folder on the desktop, and the location of the application icon in the folder.
  • the desktop icon position may include the position of the application icon in the navigation bar and the position of the application icon in the non-navigation bar.
  • the first information may include:
  • the desktop layout value is “4 ⁇ 6”
  • the value of the 3 position of the application icon in the navigation bar is "1 row, 1 column";
  • the value of the 4 position of the application icon in the navigation bar is "1 row, 2 columns";
  • the value of the 5 position of the application icon in the navigation bar is "1 row, 3 columns”.
  • each application icon may be uniquely identified by the name of the application icon and the pattern data of the icon.
  • the first electronic device 10 can identify the icon of the application through the data of the application name "notepad” and the icon pattern of the application.
  • the second electronic device 20 may also determine the application icon of the same application through the data of the application name and the application icon.
  • the first information may further carry information of the page where each application icon is located.
  • the first information may also be obtained by the first electronic device 10 through JSON encoding (jsonencode).
  • the second electronic device 20 can obtain desktop layout and application icon location information through JSON decoding, and can also obtain folder information.
  • the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the second electronic device before the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, it further includes: the second electronic device displays the first A user interface, the first user interface includes a first control and a first prompt. The first prompt indicates that the first information is received. Afterwards, in response to the user operation acting on the first control, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop according to the first information.
  • the first user interface is, for example, the prompt box 502 shown in FIG. 6C .
  • the first prompt is, for example, prompt 5021
  • the first control is, for example, accept control 5023 .
  • the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, including: the second electronic device, according to the first information, The icon is set in the first position of the second desktop; wherein, the icon of the first application on the first electronic device is also in the first position of the first desktop, and the first application is an application installed on both the first electronic device and the second electronic device .
  • the moving distance on the second desktop is the smallest, and the second application is installed on the first electronic device but not installed on the second electronic device.
  • the first application includes the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker, the application icon 2022 of the gallery, the application icon 2023 of the settings, the application icon 2024 of the Huawei wear, the application icon 2025 of the browser,
  • the mailbox application icon 2026 , the music application icon 2027 , the memo application icon 2028 , the heart health research application icon 2029 , and the application icon 2020 of the application store are applications installed on both the first electronic device and the second electronic device.
  • the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the application icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 is also located in the first row and the second column.
  • the application icon 2022 of the gallery is located in the third row and the second column, which is the same as the location of the icon 1030 of the gallery application on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the set application icon 2023, the Huawei wear application icon 2024, the browser application icon 2025, the mailbox application icon 2026, the music application icon 2027, the memo The application icon 2028 of , the application icon 2029 of the heart health research, and the application icon 2020 of the application store are in the same location as the same application icon on the first electronic device.
  • the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device.
  • the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device.
  • the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
  • the position of each application icon on the second desktop is the same as the position of the same application icon on the first desktop on the first electronic device 10 .
  • the first information can also be transmitted between the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 through NFC and a mobile communication network.
  • the method may include:
  • Step 1 The second electronic device displays the second desktop.
  • the second desktop is, for example, the user interface shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 12 , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 14 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 15 .
  • the user interface shown, the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 16 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 17 are examples of the user interface shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 12 , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 14 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 15 .
  • the user interface shown, the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 16 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 17 are examples of the user interface shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 12 , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 14 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 15 .
  • Step 2 The second electronic device receives a user operation for turning on the NFC module of the short-range wireless communication technology.
  • the user operation for turning on the NFC module of the short-range wireless communication technology is, for example, the user operation acting on the NFC switch 503 shown in FIG. 6B .
  • Step 3 The second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device through the NFC module.
  • the first information carries the desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the location information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device.
  • Step 4 The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  • the mobile communication network transmits the first information
  • the method may include:
  • Step 1 The second electronic device displays the second desktop.
  • Step 2 In response to the second electronic device logging in to the first account, the second electronic device displays a second user interface.
  • the second electronic device 20 when the second electronic device 20 successfully logs in to the first account (eg, a Huawei account), the second electronic device 20 can A second user interface is displayed, which is analogous to the user interface 800 on the first electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 11A .
  • the second user interface contains a second control, eg option 2.
  • the second electronic device 20 may also receive a user operation acting on option 2 .
  • the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology.
  • the first information carries desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device.
  • the second electronic device 20 may display the prompt box 805 shown in FIG. 11B .
  • the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information.
  • the second electronic device and the first electronic device are also logged in with the first account.
  • Step 3 In response to a user operation acting on the second control, the second electronic device receives the first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology.
  • the first information carries desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device;
  • Step 4 The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  • Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, when the computer or the processor is run on the computer, the computer or the processor is made to execute any one of the above methods. or multiple steps.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product including instructions.
  • the computer program product when run on a computer or processor, causes the computer or processor to perform one or more steps of any of the above methods.
  • all or part of the functions may be implemented by software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

An application icon layout method and a related apparatus. In the method, a first electronic device can transmit, to a second electronic device by means of one or more of techniques, such as Bluetooth, WiFi, and NFC, first information that carries desktop layout information and application icon location information. The first electronic device further can transmit the first information to the second electronic device by means of a cellular mobile communication technique or a WAN technique. In response to a user operation, the first electronic device can transmit, to the second electronic device, the first information that carries the desktop layout information and the application icon location information. The second electronic device can receive the first information, and according to desktop layout and an application icon location indicated by the first information, performs layout on the icon of an installed application on a desktop. Therefore, the convenience of using an electronic device can be improved.

Description

应用图标布局方法及相关装置Application icon layout method and related device
本申请要求于2020年07月30日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010753568.6、申请名称为“应用图标布局方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application with the application number 202010753568.6 and the application title "Applying Icon Layout Method and Related Devices" filed with the China Patent Office on July 30, 2020, the entire contents of which are incorporated into this application by reference .
技术领域technical field
本申请涉及电子技术领域,尤其涉及一种应用图标布局方法及相关装置。The present application relates to the field of electronic technologies, and in particular, to an application icon layout method and related devices.
背景技术Background technique
当前,手机等电子设备飞速发展,电子设备上应用也越来越多。随着用户使用一台电子设备时间越来越长,用户越来越熟悉各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置。从而,在使用电子设备时,用户能够快速在电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开。At present, with the rapid development of electronic devices such as mobile phones, there are more and more applications on electronic devices. As a user uses an electronic device for a longer period of time, the user is more and more familiar with where the icons of various applications are located on the desktop of the device. Therefore, when using the electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the electronic device and open it.
然而,当用户更换新的电子设备后,由于不熟悉应用的图标在新的电子设备的桌面上所处的位置,用户需花费较长的时间在桌面上寻找应用的图标。这样,降低了使用电子设备的便利性。However, after the user replaces the new electronic device, the user needs to spend a long time searching for the icon of the application on the desktop because he is not familiar with the location of the icon of the application on the desktop of the new electronic device. In this way, the convenience of using the electronic device is reduced.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请公开了一种应用图标布局方法及相关装置。第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。这样,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。The present application discloses an application icon layout method and a related device. For the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device, the layout of the desktop icons can be performed according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. In this way, the user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device, thereby improving the convenience of using the electronic device.
第一方面,本申请提供了一种应用图标布局方法,该方法包括:第一电子设备显示第一桌面,第二电子设备显示第二桌面;该第二电子设备接收第一用户操作;响应于该第一用户操作,该第二电子设备发送第一广播;该第一电子设备接收第二用户操作;响应于该第二用户操作,该第一电子设备通过该第一广播发现该第二电子设备,并向该第二电子设备发送第一信息;其中,该第一信息携带该第一桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在该第一桌面的位置信息;该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置。In a first aspect, the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: a first electronic device displays a first desktop, and a second electronic device displays a second desktop; the second electronic device receives a first user operation; The first user operation, the second electronic device sends a first broadcast; the first electronic device receives a second user operation; in response to the second user operation, the first electronic device discovers the second electronic device through the first broadcast device, and send the first information to the second electronic device; wherein, the first information carries the desktop layout information of the first desktop and the location information of the application icon on the first desktop; the second electronic device according to the first desktop The information resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
实施第一方面提供的方法,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。By implementing the method provided in the first aspect, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
例如,第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置对用户来说是熟悉的。用户能够快速在该第一电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开。第二电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置对用户来说是不熟悉。这样,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。For example, the positions of the icons of various applications on the first electronic device on the desktop of the device are familiar to the user. The user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the first electronic device. The positions of the icons of each application on the second electronic device on the desktop of the device are unfamiliar to the user. In this way, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用图标布局方法,该方法包括:第二电子设备显示第二桌面;该第二电子设备接收第一用户操作;响应于该第一用户操作,该第二电子设备发送第一广播;该第一广播用于该第一电子设备发现该第二电子设备;该第二电子设备接收该第一电子设备发送的第一信息,该第一信息携带该第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在该第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: a second electronic device displays a second desktop; the second electronic device receives a first user operation; in response to the first user operation, the The second electronic device sends a first broadcast; the first broadcast is used by the first electronic device to discover the second electronic device; the second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device, and the first information carries the The desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the location information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device; the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device. The location of the second desktop.
实施第二方面提供的方法,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。By implementing the method provided in the second aspect, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
其中,桌面布局可包含桌面的页面页数和每页上所容纳图标的最大数量(例如桌面每页上所容纳图标的每行最多4个,最多6列,即最大数量为4×6=24)。在本申请实施例中,每页上所容纳的图标的最大数量可以指应用图标区上容纳的图标的最大数量。应用图标在桌面上的位置,是指应用图标在该应用图标区和导航栏上所在的行和列。其中,所在的行从上到下数,所在的列从左到右数。The desktop layout may include the number of pages on the desktop and the maximum number of icons contained on each page (for example, each page of the desktop contains a maximum of 4 icons per row and a maximum of 6 columns, that is, the maximum number is 4 × 6 = 24 ). In this embodiment of the present application, the maximum number of icons accommodated on each page may refer to the maximum number of icons accommodated in the application icon area. The location of the application icon on the desktop refers to the row and column where the application icon is located in the application icon area and navigation bar. Among them, the row is counted from top to bottom, and the column is counted from left to right.
本申请实施例中,第一信息不限于携带应用图标在桌面的位置信息,还可以携带控件在桌面的位置信息。第一电子设备可将携带上述控件在桌面的位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备。第二电子设备可按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局,并按照第一信息对相应的控件进行布局。对控件进行布局之后,第二电子设备上的相应的控件在桌面或者下拉菜单栏的位置与第一电子设备上相同。In this embodiment of the present application, the first information is not limited to carrying the location information of the application icon on the desktop, and may also carry the location information of the control on the desktop. The first electronic device may send the first information carrying the position information of the control on the desktop to the second electronic device. The second electronic device may layout the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information, and layout the corresponding controls according to the first information. After the controls are laid out, the positions of the corresponding controls on the second electronic device on the desktop or the pull-down menu bar are the same as those on the first electronic device.
其中,控件可包含小工具、负一屏上的各个功能控件,例如付款码控件、打车控件、物流信息展示控件、机票展示控件等。控件还可包含控制中心上的功能控件,例如Wi-Fi开关、蓝牙开关、音乐组件等。The controls may include widgets and various functional controls on the negative screen, such as payment code controls, taxi controls, logistics information display controls, and air ticket display controls. Controls can also include functional controls on the Control Center, such as Wi-Fi switches, Bluetooth switches, music components, and more.
本申请实施例中,第一信息可以是第一电子设备通过XML编码方式编码得到。第二电子设备在接收到第一信息之后,通过XML解码可获得桌面布局和应用图标位置信息,还可获得文件夹信息。文件夹信息可包含文件夹名称、文件夹所包含的应用图标、文件夹在桌面所在的位置、文件夹中应用图标位置等信息。其中,桌面图标位置可包含导航栏中应用图标位置和非导航栏中应用图标位置。In this embodiment of the present application, the first information may be obtained by encoding the first electronic device in an XML encoding manner. After receiving the first information, the second electronic device can obtain desktop layout and application icon location information through XML decoding, and can also obtain folder information. The folder information may include information such as the folder name, the application icon contained in the folder, the location of the folder on the desktop, and the location of the application icon in the folder. Wherein, the desktop icon position may include the position of the application icon in the navigation bar and the position of the application icon in the non-navigation bar.
本申请实施例中,每个应用图标可通过应用图标的名称和图标的图案数据唯一标识。例如,多个记事本应用的应用名称相同,均为“记事本”。但是这多个记事本应用的图标图案不同,第一电子设备可通过应用名称“记事本”和应用的图标图案的数据标识该应用的图标。第二电子设备也可通过应用名称和应用的图标的数据确定相同的应用的应用图标。In this embodiment of the present application, each application icon may be uniquely identified by the name of the application icon and the pattern data of the icon. For example, multiple Notepad apps have the same app name as "Notepad". However, the icon patterns of the multiple notepad applications are different, and the first electronic device can identify the icon of the application by using the application name "notepad" and the data of the icon pattern of the application. The second electronic device may also determine the application icon of the same application through the data of the application name and the application icon.
本申请实施例中,第二电子设备的极速分享开关打开后,第二电子设备可发送蓝牙广播或Wi-Fi广播。该蓝牙广播和Wi-Fi广播可携带第二电子设备的MAC地址和设备标识(设备标识例如Lisa的手机)。第一电子设备在进行搜索时,可接收到第二电子设备发送的蓝牙广播或Wi-Fi广播,即搜索到(发现)第二电子设备。第一电子设备可根据接收到的第二电子设备的广播将第二电子设备的设备标识显示出来。用户可触摸该设备标识,响应于作用在该设备标识的用户操作,第一电子设备向第二电子设备发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。In the embodiment of the present application, after the speed sharing switch of the second electronic device is turned on, the second electronic device can send a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast. The Bluetooth broadcast and the Wi-Fi broadcast may carry the MAC address and device identification of the second electronic device (the device identification is, for example, Lisa's mobile phone). When the first electronic device searches, it can receive the Bluetooth broadcast or Wi-Fi broadcast sent by the second electronic device, that is, search for (discover) the second electronic device. The first electronic device may display the device identification of the second electronic device according to the received broadcast of the second electronic device. The user can touch the device identification, and in response to the user operation acting on the device identification, the first electronic device sends first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该第一广播为蓝牙广播或者无线保真Wi-Fi广播,该第一信息通过无线局域网WLAN直连或者蓝牙连接由第一电子设备发送给第二电子设备。In combination with the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first broadcast is a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast, and the first information is sent by the first electronic device to the second electronic device through a wireless local area network (WLAN) direct connection or a Bluetooth connection. equipment.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该第一用户操作为开启该第二电子设备的蓝牙开关的用户操作或者开启该第二电子设备的Wi-Fi开关的用户操作;该第二用户操作用于开启该第一电子设备的Wi-Fi模块、蓝牙模块中的一个或多个。In combination with the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first user operation is a user operation to turn on the Bluetooth switch of the second electronic device or a user operation to turn on the Wi-Fi switch of the second electronic device; the second user operation for turning on one or more of the Wi-Fi module and the Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当第一电子设备的桌面包含多个页面时,第一信息还可携带每个应用图标所在的页面的信息。In some embodiments of the present application, when the desktop of the first electronic device includes multiple pages, the first information may further carry information of the page where each application icon is located.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该第二电子设备接收该第一电子设备发送的第一信息之后,该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置之前,该方法还包括:该第二电子设备显示第一用户界面,该第一用户界面包含第一控件和第一提示;该第一提示指示接收到该第一信息;该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置,包括:响应于作用在该第一控件的用户操作,该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置。In combination with the second aspect, in some embodiments, after the second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets The application icon is before the position of the second desktop, and the method further includes: displaying, on the second electronic device, a first user interface, the first user interface including a first control and a first prompt; the first prompt indicates that the first user interface is received. information; the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop according to the first information, including: in response to a user operation acting on the first control, the first The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置,包括:该第二电子设备根据该第一信息,将该第一应用的图标设置在该二桌面的第一位置;其中,该第一电子设备上该第一应用的图标也在该第一桌面的该第一位置,该第一应用为该第一电子设备和该第二电子设备均安装的应用;该第二电子设备上第二应用被重新设置位置时在该第二桌面上移动距离最小,该第二应用为该第一电子设备上有安装但该第二电子设备上未安装的应用。In combination with the second aspect, in some embodiments, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, including: the second electronic device according to the first information. In the first information, the icon of the first application is set in the first position of the two desktops; wherein, the icon of the first application on the first electronic device is also in the first position of the first desktop, the first An application is an application installed on both the first electronic device and the second electronic device; when the second application on the second electronic device is reset, the moving distance on the second desktop is the smallest, and the second application is the first application An application is installed on one electronic device but not installed on the second electronic device.
结合第二方面,在一些实施例中,该第一信息还携带文件夹信息,该文件夹信息包含第一文件夹在该第一桌面上的位置、该第一文件夹包含第一图标和第二图标、该第一图标在该第一文件夹中的位置和该第二图标在该第一文件夹中的位置。With reference to the second aspect, in some embodiments, the first information also carries folder information, the folder information includes the location of the first folder on the first desktop, the first folder includes the first icon and the first Two icons, the position of the first icon in the first folder, and the position of the second icon in the first folder.
例如,第二电子设备按照该第一信息对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局之后,第二电子设备的桌面上也可包含3页。但左边两页由于无应用图标分布,第二电子设备的桌面也可仅包含一个页面。重新布局之后,在该页面上,每个应用图标所在的位置与第一电子设备上该相同的应用图标的位置相同。具体的,重新布局之后,在第二电子设备的桌面上,AI音箱的应用图标位于第1行第2列,与第一电子设备上AI音箱的应用图标的位置相同。即第一电子设备上AI音箱的图标也位于第1行第2列。重新布局之后,在第二电子设备的桌面上,图库的应用图标位于第3行第2列,与第一电子设备上图库应用的图标的位置相同。重新布局之后,类似地,在第二电子设备的桌面上,设置的应用图标、华为穿戴的应用图标、浏览器的应用图标、邮箱的应用图标、音乐的应用图标、备忘录的应用图标、心脏健康研究的应用图标、应用商店的应用图标与第一电子设备上相同应用图标的位置相同。For example, after the second electronic device lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the first information, the desktop of the second electronic device may also include three pages. However, since no application icons are distributed on the two pages on the left, the desktop of the second electronic device may also include only one page. After the rearrangement, on the page, the position of each application icon is the same as the position of the same application icon on the first electronic device. Specifically, after the rearrangement, on the desktop of the second electronic device, the application icon of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the position of the application icon of the AI speaker on the first electronic device. That is, the icon of the AI speaker on the first electronic device is also located in the first row and the second column. After the rearrangement, on the desktop of the second electronic device, the application icon of the gallery is located in the 3rd row and the 2nd column, which is the same as the position of the icon of the gallery application on the first electronic device. After the rearrangement, similarly, on the desktop of the second electronic device, the settings application icons, Huawei wear application icons, browser application icons, mailbox application icons, music application icons, memo application icons, heart health The location of the researched application icon and the application icon of the application store is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device.
类似的,重新布局之后,第二电子设备的桌面的导航栏中应用图标与第一电子设备上相同应用图标的位置相同。相机的应用图标、拨号的应用图标、信息的应用图标、联系人的应用图标,分别位于第二电子设备桌面的导航栏的第1列、第2列、第3列和第4列。这与第一电子设备的桌面导航栏中相同应用图标的位置相同。Similarly, after the rearrangement, the position of the application icon in the navigation bar of the desktop of the second electronic device is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device. The camera application icon, the dialing application icon, the information application icon, and the contact application icon are respectively located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the fourth column of the navigation bar on the desktop of the second electronic device. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the desktop navigation bar of the first electronic device.
这样,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可根据用户操作按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。In this way, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device according to the user operation. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用图标布局方法,该方法包括:第一电子设备显 示第一桌面;该第一电子设备接收第二用户操作;响应于该第二用户操作,该第一电子设备发现该第二电子设备,并向该第二电子设备发送第一信息;其中,该第一信息携带该第一桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在该第一桌面的位置信息;该第一信息用于该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二电子设备的桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二电子设备的桌面的位置。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: a first electronic device displays a first desktop; the first electronic device receives a second user operation; in response to the second user operation, the The first electronic device discovers the second electronic device, and sends the first information to the second electronic device; wherein, the first information carries the desktop layout information of the first desktop and the position information of the application icon on the first desktop; The first information is used by the second electronic device to reset the desktop layout of the desktop of the second electronic device and to set the position of the application icon on the desktop of the second electronic device according to the first information.
实施第三方面提供的方法,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。By implementing the method provided in the third aspect, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
结合第三方面,在一些实施例中,该第一信息通过无线局域网WLAN直连或者蓝牙连接由第一电子设备发送给第二电子设备。With reference to the third aspect, in some embodiments, the first information is sent from the first electronic device to the second electronic device through a wireless local area network (WLAN) direct connection or a Bluetooth connection.
结合第三方面,在一些实施例中,该第二用户操作用于开启该第一电子设备的Wi-Fi模块、蓝牙模块中的一个或多个。With reference to the third aspect, in some embodiments, the second user operates to turn on one or more of a Wi-Fi module and a Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用图标布局方法,其特征在于,该方法包括:第二电子设备显示第二桌面;该第二电子设备接收用于开启近距离无线通信技术NFC模块的用户操作;该第二电子设备通过该NFC模块接收该第一电子设备发送的第一信息,该第一信息携带该第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在该第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, wherein the method includes: a second electronic device displays a second desktop; the second electronic device receives an NFC module for enabling a short-range wireless communication technology The second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device through the NFC module, and the first information carries the desktop layout information and application icons of the desktop of the first electronic device on the first electronic device. The position information of the desktop; the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
实施第四方面提供的方法,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。By implementing the method provided in the fourth aspect, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种应用图标布局方法,该方法包括:该第二电子设备显示第二桌面;响应于该第二电子设备登录第一账号,该第二电子设备显示第二用户界面;其中,该第二电子设备第一电子设备也登陆有该第一账号;该第二用户界面包含第二控件;响应于作用在该第二控件的用户操作,该第二电子设备通过移动通信技术从该第一电子设备接收第一信息,该第一信息携带该第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在该第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置。In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an application icon layout method, the method includes: the second electronic device displays a second desktop; in response to the second electronic device logging in to a first account, the second electronic device displays a first Two user interfaces; wherein, the first electronic device of the second electronic device is also logged in with the first account; the second user interface includes a second control; in response to a user operation acting on the second control, the second electronic device The first information is received from the first electronic device through the mobile communication technology, and the first information carries the desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device; the second electronic device The device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
在本申请的一些实施例中,该应用图标布局方法还包括:第一电子设备显示第一桌面,第二电子设备显示第二桌面;所述第一电子设备接收第三用户操作;响应于所述第三用户操作,第二电子设备检测是否进行了摇动。第一电子设备也可检测是否进行了摇动。当第一电子设备和第二电子设备均进行了摇动时,第一电子设备可携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备。该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置该第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在该第二桌面的位置。In some embodiments of the present application, the application icon layout method further includes: the first electronic device displays a first desktop, and the second electronic device displays a second desktop; the first electronic device receives a third user operation; According to the third user operation, the second electronic device detects whether shaking is performed. The first electronic device may also detect whether shaking has been performed. When both the first electronic device and the second electronic device are shaken, the first electronic device may carry the first information of the desktop layout information and the position information of the application icon and send it to the second electronic device. The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop according to the first information.
其中,第一电子设备和第二电子设备可通过加速度传感器检测到的数据确定是否进行了摇动。Wherein, the first electronic device and the second electronic device may determine whether shaking is performed through the data detected by the acceleration sensor.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,第一电子设备还可利用移动通信技术、WAN技术通过即时 通信应用(例如微信、QQ等应用)将第一信息传输给第二电子设备。In other embodiments of the present application, the first electronic device may also transmit the first information to the second electronic device by using a mobile communication technology and a WAN technology through an instant communication application (such as WeChat, QQ and other applications).
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备可通过移动通信技术、WAN技术向第二电子设备传输第一信息。第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可根据第一信息按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。In this embodiment of the present application, the first electronic device may transmit the first information to the second electronic device through a mobile communication technology or a WAN technology. For the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device, the layout of the desktop icons can be performed according to the first information according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供了一种第二电子设备,该第二电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块;蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块,用于发送第一广播,并与第一电子设备建立蓝牙连接或者Wi-Fi连接;该存储器与该一个或多个处理器耦合,该存储器用于存储计算机程序代码;该计算机程序代码包括计算机指令,该一个或多个处理器调用该计算机指令以使得该电子设备执行第二方面所提供的应用图标布局方法。In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a second electronic device, where the second electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, a Bluetooth module, and a Wi-Fi module; the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module are used for for sending the first broadcast and establishing a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection with the first electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, and the memory is used for storing computer program code; the computer program code includes computer instructions, The one or more processors invoke the computer instructions to cause the electronic device to execute the application icon layout method provided by the second aspect.
第七方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备为第一电子设备,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块;所述蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块,用于通过第一广播发现第二电子设备,并与第二电子设备建立蓝牙连接或者Wi-Fi连接;所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行第三方面所提供的所述的应用图标布局方法。In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, the electronic device is a first electronic device, and the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, a Bluetooth module, and a Wi-Fi module; the Bluetooth a module and a Wi-Fi module for discovering the second electronic device through the first broadcast and establishing a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection with the second electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the The memory is used to store computer program codes, and the computer program codes include computer instructions; when the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device causes the electronic device to execute the application icon provided in the third aspect layout method.
第八方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第二电子设备,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、NFC模块;所述NFC模块,用于接收第一电子设备发送的第一信息;所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行第四方面所提供的所述的应用图标布局方法。In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, the electronic device is a second electronic device, and the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, and an NFC module; the NFC module is used for receiving first information sent by the first electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory is used to store computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions; when the one or more processors When each processor executes the computer instructions, the electronic device executes the application icon layout method provided in the fourth aspect.
第九方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第二电子设备,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、移动通信模块;所述移动通信模块,用于接收第一电子设备发送的第一信息;所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行第五方面所提供所述的应用图标布局方法。In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device, the electronic device is a second electronic device, and the electronic device includes: one or more processors, a memory, and a mobile communication module; the mobile communication module, for receiving the first information sent by the first electronic device; the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory is used for storing computer program code, the computer program code includes computer instructions; when the one When the computer instructions are executed by the or multiple processors, the electronic device executes the application icon layout method provided in the fifth aspect.
第十方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片,该芯片应用于第二电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,该处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得该第二电子设备执行如第二方面以及第二方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, the chip is applied to a second electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are configured to invoke computer instructions to cause the second electronic device to perform as described in Section 1. The method described in the second aspect and any possible implementation manner of the second aspect.
第十一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片,该芯片应用于第一电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,该处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得该第一电子设备执行如第三方面以及第三方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, the chip is applied to a first electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are used for invoking computer instructions to cause the first electronic device to execute such as The third aspect and the method described in any possible implementation manner of the third aspect.
第十二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种芯片,该芯片应用于第二电子设备,该芯片包括一个或多个处理器,该处理器用于调用计算机指令以使得该第二电子设备执行如第四方面或者第五方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a chip, which is applied to a second electronic device, the chip includes one or more processors, and the processors are configured to invoke computer instructions to cause the second electronic device to execute the following The method described in any possible implementation manner of the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect.
第十三方面,本申请实施例提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当上述计算机程序产品在第二电子设备上运行时,使得上述电子设备执行如第二方面以及第二方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a thirteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions, when the computer program product is executed on a second electronic device, the electronic device is made to perform any one of the second aspect and the second aspect. implementation of the method described.
第十四方面,本申请实施例提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当上述计算机程序产 品在第一电子设备上运行时,使得上述第一电子设备执行如第三方面以及第三方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。A fourteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product including instructions, when the computer program product is executed on a first electronic device, the first electronic device is made to execute any one of the third aspect and the third aspect. A possible implementation of the method described.
第十五方面,本申请实施例提供一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当上述计算机程序产品在第二电子设备上运行时,使得上述电子设备执行如第四方面或者第五方面描述的方法。In a fifteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product containing instructions, when the computer program product is executed on a second electronic device, the electronic device is made to execute the method described in the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect.
第十六方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当上述指令在第二电子设备上运行时,使得上述第二电子设备执行如第二方面以及第二方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a sixteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the above-mentioned instructions are executed on a second electronic device, the above-mentioned second electronic device is made to execute any one of the second aspect and the second aspect. A possible implementation of the method described.
第十七方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当上述指令在第一电子设备上运行时,使得上述第一电子设备执行如第三方面以及第三方面中任一可能的实现方式描述的方法。In a seventeenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the above-mentioned instructions are executed on a first electronic device, the above-mentioned first electronic device is made to execute any one of the third aspect and the third aspect. A possible implementation of the method described.
第十八方面,本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质,包括指令,当上述指令在第二电子设备上运行时,使得上述第二电子设备执行如第四方面或者第五方面描述的方法。In an eighteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, including instructions, when the above-mentioned instructions are executed on a second electronic device, the above-mentioned second electronic device is caused to execute the fourth aspect or the fifth aspect. method.
第十九方面,本申请实施例提供一种系统,该系统包含第一电子设备和第二电子设备。该第一电子设备和第二电子设备用于执行第一方面所描述的方法。In a nineteenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a system, where the system includes a first electronic device and a second electronic device. The first electronic device and the second electronic device are used to perform the method described in the first aspect.
可以理解地,上述第六方面提供的第二电子设备、第七方面提供的电子设备、第八方面提供的电子设备、第九方面提供的电子设备、第十方面提供的芯片、第十一方面提供的芯片、第十二方面提供的芯片、第十三方面提供的计算机程序产品、第十四方面提供的计算机程序产品、第十五方面提供的计算机程序产品、第十六方面提供的计算机存储介质、第十七方面提供的计算机存储介质、第十八方面提供的计算机存储介质和第十九方面提供的系统均用于执行本申请实施例所提供的方法。因此,其所能达到的有益效果可参考对应方法中的有益效果,此处不再赘述。Understandably, the second electronic device provided in the sixth aspect, the electronic device provided in the seventh aspect, the electronic device provided in the eighth aspect, the electronic device provided in the ninth aspect, the chip provided in the tenth aspect, and the eleventh aspect The chip provided, the chip provided by the twelfth aspect, the computer program product provided by the thirteenth aspect, the computer program product provided by the fourteenth aspect, the computer program product provided by the fifteenth aspect, and the computer storage provided by the sixteenth aspect The medium, the computer storage medium provided in the seventeenth aspect, the computer storage medium provided in the eighteenth aspect, and the system provided in the nineteenth aspect are all used to execute the method provided by the embodiments of the present application. Therefore, for the beneficial effects that can be achieved, reference may be made to the beneficial effects in the corresponding method, which will not be repeated here.
附图说明Description of drawings
下面对本申请实施例用到的附图进行介绍。The accompanying drawings used in the embodiments of the present application will be introduced below.
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构的结构示意图;1 is a schematic structural diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备30的结构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 30 provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请实施例的电子设备30的软件结构框图;3 is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device 30 according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种用户界面的示意图;4 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5A~图5D是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;5A to 5D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application;
图6A~图6D是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;6A to 6D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application;
图7是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;7 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;8 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;9 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;10 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11A~图11C是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;11A to 11C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application;
图12~图17为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图;12 to 17 are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application;
图18是本申请实施例提供的一种应用图标布局方法的流程示意图。FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of an application icon layout method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
下面结合本申请实施例中的附图对本申请实施例进行描述。本申请实施例的实施方式部 分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本申请。The embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present application. The terms used in the implementation part of the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain the specific embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.
首先,介绍本申请实施例涉及的应用场景。当用户更换电子设备时,用户可能对该电子设备的桌面上应用图标的布局以及各个应用图标的位置不熟悉。类似的,当一个用户有多个电子设备(例如用两个手机)时,用户对其中一个电子设备上应用的图标在桌面所处的位置熟悉,对另一个电子设备上应用的图标在桌面所处的位置可能并不熟悉。这样,当用户更换电子设备时,或者用户使用不熟悉的电子设备时,用户需花费较长的时间在桌面上寻找应用的图标,降低了使用电子设备的便利性。First, the application scenarios involved in the embodiments of the present application are introduced. When a user replaces an electronic device, the user may be unfamiliar with the layout of application icons on the desktop of the electronic device and the positions of each application icon. Similarly, when a user has multiple electronic devices (for example, two mobile phones), the user is familiar with the location on the desktop of the icon applied on one electronic device, and is familiar with the location on the desktop of the icon applied on the other electronic device. The location may be unfamiliar. In this way, when the user replaces the electronic device, or when the user uses an unfamiliar electronic device, the user needs to spend a long time searching for the icon of the application on the desktop, which reduces the convenience of using the electronic device.
为提高使用电子设备的便利性,本申请实施例提供一种应用图标布局方法及相关装置。该应用图标布局方法中,第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置对用户来说是熟悉的。用户能够快速在该第一电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开。第二电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置对用户来说是不熟悉。In order to improve the convenience of using electronic devices, embodiments of the present application provide an application icon layout method and related apparatuses. In the application icon layout method, the positions of the icons of each application on the first electronic device on the device desktop are familiar to the user. The user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the first electronic device. The positions of the icons of each application on the second electronic device on the desktop of the device are unfamiliar to the user.
第一电子设备可通过蓝牙、无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)、近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC)中的一项或多项等技术向第二电子设备传输数据。该数据例如是携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。第一电子设备还可通过3G、LTE、5G等蜂窝移动通信技术或广域网(wide area network,WAN)技术向第二电子设备传输数据。第一电子设备可响应于用户操作,将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备。第二电子设备可接收该第一信息,并按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。重新布局完成后,第二电子设备与第一电子设备上同一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同。其中桌面布局可包含桌面的页面页数和每页上所容纳图标的最大数量(例如桌面每页上所容纳图标的每行最多4个,最多6列,即最大数量为4×6=24)。The first electronic device may transmit data to the second electronic device through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi), and near field communication (NFC). The data is, for example, the first information that carries desktop layout information and application icon location information. The first electronic device may also transmit data to the second electronic device through cellular mobile communication technologies such as 3G, LTE, 5G, or a wide area network (wide area network, WAN) technology. The first electronic device may send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the second electronic device in response to the user operation. The second electronic device may receive the first information, and lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the icon of the same application on the second electronic device and the first electronic device are in the same position on the desktop. The desktop layout can include the number of pages on the desktop and the maximum number of icons contained on each page (for example, each page of the desktop contains a maximum of 4 icons per row and a maximum of 6 columns, that is, the maximum number is 4×6=24) .
这样,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。In this way, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
下面对本申请实施例所涉及的系统架构进行介绍。请参阅图1,图1是本申请实施例提供的一种系统架构的结构示意图。如图1所示,该系统包含第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20。其中:The following introduces the system architecture involved in the embodiments of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a system architecture provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 1 , the system includes a first electronic device 10 and a second electronic device 20 . in:
第一电子设备10上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置对用户来说是熟悉的。用户能够快速在该第一电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开。The positions of the icons of each application on the first electronic device 10 on the desktop of the device are familiar to the user. The user can quickly find and open the icon of the application on the desktop of the first electronic device.
第一电子设备10可与第二电子设备20之间传输数据,具体可通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi、NFC中的一项或多项等技术传输数据。例如,第一电子设备10可利用huawei share(后文中的极速分享控件实现)实现第一电子设备10向第二电子设备20传输数据。具体的,第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20中蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块均开启。第一电子设备10可利用蓝牙模块扫描发现第二电子设备20。之后第一电子设备10可显示扫描到的第二电子设备的设备标识。响应于作用在该设备标识的用户操作,第一电子设备10可通过WLAN直连向第二电子设备20传输数据。该数据例如是携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。The first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 can transmit data, and specifically, the data can be transmitted through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and NFC. For example, the first electronic device 10 may utilize huawei share (implemented by the ultra-fast sharing control hereinafter) to realize the transmission of data from the first electronic device 10 to the second electronic device 20 . Specifically, both the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module in the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are turned on. The first electronic device 10 can scan and discover the second electronic device 20 by using the Bluetooth module. Afterwards, the first electronic device 10 may display the scanned device identification of the second electronic device. In response to a user operation acting on the device identification, the first electronic device 10 may transmit data to the second electronic device 20 through the WLAN direct connection. The data is, for example, the first information that carries desktop layout information and application icon location information.
其中,第一电子设备10可通过低功耗蓝牙(bluetooth low energy,BLE)和/或经典蓝牙BR/EDR(Basic Rate/Enhanced Data Rate)技术向第二电子设备20传输数据。本申请实施例 所利用的蓝牙技术可包含不同版本的蓝牙协议,例如蓝牙版本1.0、1.2、2.0+EDR、3.0+HS、4.0、4.1、4.2和5.0。Wherein, the first electronic device 10 can transmit data to the second electronic device 20 by using bluetooth low energy (BLE) and/or classic Bluetooth BR/EDR (Basic Rate/Enhanced Data Rate) technology. The Bluetooth technology utilized in the embodiments of the present application may include different versions of Bluetooth protocols, such as Bluetooth versions 1.0, 1.2, 2.0+EDR, 3.0+HS, 4.0, 4.1, 4.2, and 5.0.
其中,Wi-Fi技术例如是WLAN直连。本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10可通过WLAN直连向第二电子设备20传输携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。WLAN直连技术使得第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20之间可直接传输数据而无需经过无线接入点。本申请实施例中,不限于WLAN直连,第一电子设备10还可通过其他Wi-Fi技术向第二电子设备20传输第一信息,例如通过第一电子设备10经由Wi-Fi接入点向第二电子设备20传输数据。The Wi-Fi technology is, for example, WLAN direct connection. In the embodiment of the present application, the first electronic device 10 may transmit the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the second electronic device 20 through the WLAN direct connection. The WLAN Direct technology enables data to be directly transmitted between the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 without going through a wireless access point. In the embodiment of the present application, not limited to WLAN direct connection, the first electronic device 10 can also transmit the first information to the second electronic device 20 through other Wi-Fi technologies, for example, through the first electronic device 10 via a Wi-Fi access point Data is transmitted to the second electronic device 20 .
本申请实施例中,在NFC场景下,第一电子设备中NFC模块和第二电子设备中NFC模块可工作在点对点(peertopeer,P2P)模式。第一电子设备与第二电子设备可通过传输数据。In the embodiment of the present application, in the NFC scenario, the NFC module in the first electronic device and the NFC module in the second electronic device may work in a peer-to-peer (peertopeer, P2P) mode. The first electronic device and the second electronic device can transmit data.
本申请实施例中,不限于蓝牙、Wi-Fi、NFC,第一电子设备10还可通过3G、LTE、5G等蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术向第二电子设备20传输数据。In the embodiments of the present application, not limited to Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and NFC, the first electronic device 10 may also transmit data to the second electronic device 20 through cellular mobile communication technologies such as 3G, LTE, 5G, or WAN technologies.
图1所示出的系统架构中,第一电子设备10可向第二电子设备20发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。第二电子设备20可按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。重新布局完成后,第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上桌面布局相同,且第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上同一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同。In the system architecture shown in FIG. 1 , the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 . The second electronic device 20 may lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 have the same desktop layout, and the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in the same position on the desktop.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20均可以是手机、智能手表、平板电脑、个人电脑等。In this embodiment of the present application, both the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 may be a mobile phone, a smart watch, a tablet computer, a personal computer, or the like.
下面介绍一种电子设备的结构示例,第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20可均采用该电子设备的结构。请参阅图2,图2是本申请实施例提供的一种电子设备30的结构示意图。An example of the structure of an electronic device is described below. The first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 can both adopt the structure of the electronic device. Please refer to FIG. 2 , which is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 30 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
下面以电子设备30为例对实施例进行具体说明。应该理解的是,图2所示电子设备30仅是一个范例,并且电子设备30可以具有比图2中所示的更多的或者更少的部件,可以组合两个或多个的部件,或者可以具有不同的部件配置。图中所示出的各种部件可以在包括一个或多个信号处理和/或专用集成电路在内的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合中实现。The embodiment will be described in detail below by taking the electronic device 30 as an example. It should be understood that the electronic device 30 shown in FIG. 2 is only an example, and the electronic device 30 may have more or fewer components than those shown in FIG. 2, two or more components may be combined, or Different component configurations are possible. The various components shown in the figures may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing and/or application specific integrated circuits.
电子设备30可以包括:处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 30 may include: a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charge management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2. Mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone jack 170D, sensor module 180, buttons 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, And a subscriber identification module (subscriber identification module, SIM) card interface 195 and so on. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyroscope sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备30的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备30可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structures illustrated in the embodiments of the present invention do not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 30 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 30 may include more or less components than shown, or combine some components, or separate some components, or arrange different components. The illustrated components may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU), 图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,存储器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units, for example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processor (graphics processing unit, GPU), an image signal processor (image signal processor, ISP), controller, memory, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural-network processing unit (NPU) Wait. Wherein, different processing units may be independent devices, or may be integrated in one or more processors.
其中,控制器可以是电子设备30的神经中枢和指挥中心。控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller may be the nerve center and command center of the electronic device 30 . The controller can generate an operation control signal according to the instruction operation code and timing signal, and complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。A memory may also be provided in the processor 110 for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have just been used or recycled by the processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instruction or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated accesses are avoided and the latency of the processor 110 is reduced, thereby increasing the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, the processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. The interface may include an integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, an integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, a pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, a universal asynchronous transceiver (universal asynchronous transmitter) receiver/transmitter, UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and / or universal serial bus (universal serial bus, USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备30的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus that includes a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (SCL). In some embodiments, the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can be respectively coupled to the touch sensor 180K, the charger, the flash, the camera 193 and the like through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 may couple the touch sensor 180K through the I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate with each other through the I2C bus interface, so as to realize the touch function of the electronic device 30 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, the processor 110 may contain multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 may be coupled with the audio module 170 through an I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications, sampling, quantizing and encoding analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface, so as to realize the function of answering calls through the Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus may be a bidirectional communication bus. It converts the data to be transmitted between serial communication and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is typically used to connect the processor 110 with the wireless communication module 160 . For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface, so as to realize the function of playing music through the Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备30的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备30的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 communicates with the camera 193 through a CSI interface to implement the photographing function of the electronic device 30 . The processor 110 communicates with the display screen 194 through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 30 .
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线 通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured by software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface may be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, the display screen 194, the wireless communication module 160, the audio module 170, the sensor module 180, and the like. The GPIO interface can also be configured as I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备30充电,也可以用于电子设备30与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that conforms to the USB standard specification, and may specifically be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, and the like. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 30, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 30 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through the headphones. The interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备30的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备30也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationship between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention is only a schematic illustration, and does not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 30 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 30 may also adopt different interface connection manners in the foregoing embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection manners.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备30的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. The charger may be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 30 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142 , it can also supply power to the electronic device through the power management module 141 .
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,外部存储器,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used for connecting the battery 142 , the charging management module 140 and the processor 110 . The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140 and supplies power to the processor 110 , the internal memory 121 , the external memory, the display screen 194 , the camera 193 , and the wireless communication module 160 . The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor parameters such as battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance). In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 . In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备30的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 30 may be implemented by the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modulation and demodulation processor, the baseband processor, and the like.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备30中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。 Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 30 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example, the antenna 1 can be multiplexed as a diversity antenna of the wireless local area network. In other embodiments, the antenna may be used in conjunction with a tuning switch.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备30上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied on the electronic device 30 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA) and the like. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves from the antenna 1, filter and amplify the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modulation and demodulation processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modulation and demodulation processor, and then turn it into an electromagnetic wave for radiation through the antenna 1 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be provided in the same device as at least part of the modules of the processor 110 .
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。The modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Wherein, the modulator is used to modulate the low frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium and high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low frequency baseband signal. Then the demodulator transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. The low frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor and passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through the display screen 194 . In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other embodiments, the modem processor may be independent of the processor 110, and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备30上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如Wi-Fi网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation  satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 30 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as Wi-Fi networks), bluetooth (BT), global navigation satellite system (GNSS) ), frequency modulation (FM), near field communication (NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110 , perform frequency modulation on it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves for radiation through the antenna 2 .
在一些实施例中,电子设备30的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备30可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 30 is coupled with the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled with the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 30 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), Time Division Code Division Multiple Access (TD-SCDMA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (global positioning system, GPS), global navigation satellite system (global navigation satellite system, GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (beidou navigation satellite system, BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi -zenith satellite system, QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10中无线通信模块和移动通信模块可用于将携带桌面的布局信息和应用图标在桌面上的位置信息的第一信息发送出去。第二电子设备20可通过自身的无线通信模块和移动通信模块,接收第一信息。In the embodiment of the present application, the wireless communication module and the mobile communication module in the first electronic device 10 may be used to send the first information carrying the layout information of the desktop and the position information of the application icon on the desktop. The second electronic device 20 can receive the first information through its own wireless communication module and mobile communication module.
电子设备30通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。The electronic device 30 implements a display function through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is a microprocessor for image processing, and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. The GPU is used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备30可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。Display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, and the like. Display screen 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can be a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode or an active-matrix organic light-emitting diode (active-matrix organic light). emitting diode, AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (flex light-emitting diode, FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light-emitting diode (quantum dot light emitting diodes, QLED) and so on. In some embodiments, the electronic device 30 may include 1 or N display screens 194 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
电子设备30可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 30 can realize the shooting function through the ISP, the camera 193, the video codec, the GPU, the display screen 194 and the application processor.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193 . For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera photosensitive element through the lens, the light signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera photosensitive element transmits the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin tone. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193 .
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备30可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object is projected through the lens to generate an optical image onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element may be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then transmits the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. The ISP outputs the digital image signal to the DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other formats of image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 30 may include 1 or N cameras 193 , where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备30在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。A digital signal processor is used to process digital signals, in addition to processing digital image signals, it can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 30 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy, and the like.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备30可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备30可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. Electronic device 30 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 30 can play or record videos in various encoding formats, such as: moving picture experts group (moving picture experts group, MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4 and so on.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备30的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,人脸识别,语音识别,文本理解等。The NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. By drawing on the structure of biological neural networks, such as the transfer mode between neurons in the human brain, it can quickly process the input information, and can continuously learn by itself. Applications such as intelligent cognition of the electronic device 30 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, and the like.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备30的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 30 . The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to realize the data storage function. For example to save files like music, video etc in external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,从而执行电子设备30的各种功能应用以及数据处理。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备30使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 30 by executing the instructions stored in the internal memory 121 . The internal memory 121 may include a storage program area and a storage data area. The storage program area can store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like. The storage data area can store data (such as audio data, phone book, etc.) created during the use of the electronic device 30 and the like. In addition, the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), and the like.
电子设备30可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 30 may implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone jack 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used for converting digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and also for converting analog audio input into digital audio signal. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备30可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。 Speaker 170A, also referred to as a "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. Electronic device 30 may listen to music through speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备30接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。The receiver 170B, also referred to as "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 30 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be answered by placing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备30可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备30可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备30还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。The microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can make a sound by approaching the microphone 170C through a human mouth, and input the sound signal into the microphone 170C. The electronic device 30 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 30 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which may implement a noise reduction function in addition to collecting sound signals. In other embodiments, the electronic device 30 may further be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The earphone jack 170D is used to connect wired earphones. The earphone interface 170D can be the USB interface 130, or can be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, a cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有 导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备30根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备30根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备30也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals, and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A may be provided on the display screen 194 . There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, and the like. The capacitive pressure sensor may be comprised of at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to the pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 30 determines the intensity of the pressure from the change in capacitance. When a touch operation acts on the display screen 194, the electronic device 30 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 30 may also calculate the touched position according to the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch position but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example, when a touch operation whose intensity is less than the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction for viewing the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold acts on the short message application icon, the instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备30的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备30围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备30抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备30的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion attitude of the electronic device 30 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of electronic device 30 about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. Exemplarily, when the shutter is pressed, the gyroscope sensor 180B detects the shaking angle of the electronic device 30, calculates the distance to be compensated by the lens module according to the angle, and allows the lens to counteract the shaking of the electronic device 30 through reverse motion to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenarios.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备30通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。The air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 30 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist in positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备30可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备30是翻盖机时,电子设备30可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。The magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 30 can detect the opening and closing of the flip holster using the magnetic sensor 180D. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 30 is a flip machine, the electronic device 30 can detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Further, according to the detected opening and closing state of the leather case or the opening and closing state of the flip cover, characteristics such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备30在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备30静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the magnitude of the acceleration of the electronic device 30 in various directions (generally three axes). The magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected when the electronic device 30 is stationary. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices, and can be used in applications such as horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometers, etc.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备30可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备30可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance. The electronic device 30 can measure the distance by infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 30 can use the distance sensor 180F to measure the distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备30通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备30使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备30附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备30可以确定电子设备30附近没有物体。电子设备30可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备30贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) and light detectors, such as photodiodes. The light emitting diodes may be infrared light emitting diodes. The electronic device 30 emits infrared light to the outside through light emitting diodes. Electronic device 30 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 30 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 30 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 30 . The electronic device 30 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect that the user holds the electronic device 30 close to the ear to talk, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. Proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备30可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备30是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The electronic device 30 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 30 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touch.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备30可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。The fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 30 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to realize fingerprint unlocking, accessing application locks, taking photos with fingerprints, answering incoming calls with fingerprints, and the like.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备30利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备30执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备30对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备30异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备30对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。The temperature sensor 180J is used to detect the temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 30 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute a temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold value, the electronic device 30 may reduce the performance of the processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 30 heats the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown of the electronic device 30 due to the low temperature. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 30 boosts the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控面板”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备30的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also called "touch panel". The touch sensor 180K may be disposed on the display screen 194 , and the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, also called a “touch screen”. The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near it. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the type of touch event. Visual output related to touch operations may be provided through display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 30 , which is different from the location where the display screen 194 is located.
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。The bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human voice. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the pulse of the human body and receive the blood pressure beating signal. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be disposed in the earphone, combined with the bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibration bone block obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, so as to realize the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beat signal obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M, and realize the function of heart rate detection.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备30可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备30的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The keys 190 include a power-on key, a volume key, and the like. Keys 190 may be mechanical keys. It can also be a touch key. The electronic device 30 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 30 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。Motor 191 can generate vibrating cues. The motor 191 can be used for vibrating alerts for incoming calls, and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations acting on different applications (such as taking pictures, playing audio, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations on different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (for example: time reminder, receiving information, alarm clock, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also support customization.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 can be an indicator light, which can be used to indicate the charging state, the change of the power, and can also be used to indicate a message, a missed call, a notification, and the like.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备30的接触和分离。电子设备30可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口,N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备30通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备30采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备30中,不能和电子设备30分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be contacted and separated from the electronic device 30 by inserting into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 30 may support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. The SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card and so on. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 can also be compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 30 interacts with the network through the SIM card to realize functions such as call and data communication. In some embodiments, the electronic device 30 employs an eSIM, ie: an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 30 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 30 .
电子设备30的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本发明实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备30的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 30 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. The embodiment of the present invention takes an Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 30 as an example.
请参阅图3,图3是本申请实施例的电子设备30的软件结构框图。Please refer to FIG. 3 , which is a block diagram of a software structure of an electronic device 30 according to an embodiment of the present application.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)和系统库,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has a clear role and division of labor. Layers communicate with each other through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers, which are, from top to bottom, an application layer, an application framework layer, an Android runtime (Android runtime) and a system library, and a kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图2所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,图库,日历,通话,地图,导航,WLAN,蓝牙,视频,系统应用,短信息、桌面等应用程序。As shown in Figure 2, the application package may include applications such as camera, gallery, calendar, call, map, navigation, WLAN, Bluetooth, video, system application, short message, and desktop.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programming interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。The application framework layer provides an application programming interface (application programming interface, API) and a programming framework for applications in the application layer. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图2所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 2, the application framework layer may include window managers, content providers, view systems, telephony managers, resource managers, notification managers, and the like.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can get the size of the display screen, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, take screenshots, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make these data accessible to applications. The data may include video, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone book, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls for displaying text, controls for displaying pictures, and so on. View systems can be used to build applications. A display interface can consist of one or more views. For example, the display interface including the short message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备30的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。The phone manager is used to provide the communication function of the electronic device 30 . For example, the management of call status (including connecting, hanging up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources for the application, such as localization strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files and so on.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager enables applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages, and can disappear automatically after a brief pause without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also display notifications in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of graphs or scroll bar text, such as notifications of applications running in the background, and notifications on the screen in the form of dialog windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a prompt sound is issued, the electronic device vibrates, and the indicator light flashes.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core libraries and a virtual machine. Android runtime is responsible for scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library consists of two parts: one is the function functions that the java language needs to call, and the other is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and the application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and the application framework layer as binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform functions such as object lifecycle management, stack management, thread management, safety and exception management, and garbage collection.
系统库可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。A system library can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media library (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing library (eg: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engine (eg: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The Surface Manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides a fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as still image files. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成,和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, compositing, and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D graphics engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display drivers, camera drivers, audio drivers, and sensor drivers.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10的系统应用可包含的图标同步模块。系统应用可从桌面这个应用程序获取桌面的布局和应用图标在桌面上的位置。第一电子设备10的系统应用可将桌面的布局和应用图标在桌面上的位置依次传输到内核层,并通过通信模块(移动通信模块或无线通信模块)传输携带桌面的布局信息和应用图标在桌面上的位置信息的第一信息。In this embodiment of the present application, the system application of the first electronic device 10 may include an icon synchronization module. The system application can obtain the layout of the desktop and the position of the application icon on the desktop from the desktop application. The system application of the first electronic device 10 can sequentially transmit the layout of the desktop and the position of the application icon on the desktop to the kernel layer, and transmit the layout information carrying the desktop and the application icon through the communication module (mobile communication module or wireless communication module). The first information of the location information on the desktop.
第二电子设备20通过通信模块接收第一信息,传输给上层应用,例如传输给第二电子设备的系统应用。系统应用的图标同步功能模块根据第一信息,调整桌面应用中桌面布局和应用在桌面上的位置,调整完后将调整的数据传输给内核层,内核层驱动显示屏显示出来。The second electronic device 20 receives the first information through the communication module, and transmits it to an upper-layer application, for example, to a system application of the second electronic device. The icon synchronization function module of the system application adjusts the desktop layout in the desktop application and the position of the application on the desktop according to the first information, and after the adjustment, transmits the adjusted data to the kernel layer, and the kernel layer drives the display screen to display it.
下面分别介绍本申请实施例所涉及的用户界面。The user interfaces involved in the embodiments of the present application are respectively introduced below.
请参阅图4,图4是本申请实施例提供的一种用户界面的示意图。其中,图4所示出的用户界面100为第一电子设备10的桌面的用户界面示意图。Please refer to FIG. 4 , which is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. The user interface 100 shown in FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the user interface of the desktop of the first electronic device 10 .
如图4所示,该用户界面100可包含:状态栏101,应用图标区102,导航栏103,以及页面指示符104。其中:As shown in FIG. 4 , the user interface 100 may include: a status bar 101 , an application icon area 102 , a navigation bar 103 , and a page indicator 104 . in:
状态栏101可包括:移动通信信号(又可称为蜂窝信号)的一个或多个信号强度指示符、Wi-Fi信号的一个或多个信号强度指示符,电池状态指示符、时间指示符。The status bar 101 may include: one or more signal strength indicators for mobile communication signals (also known as cellular signals), one or more signal strength indicators for Wi-Fi signals, a battery status indicator, and a time indicator.
应用图标区102可包含一个或多个应用图标。例如智能家居的应用图标1021、AI音箱的应用图标1022、备忘录的应用图标1023、计算机的应用图标1024、应用商店的应用图标1025、音乐的应用图标1026、浏览器的应用图标1027、心脏健康研究的应用图标1028、邮箱的应用图标1029、图库的应用图标1030、设置的应用图标1031和华为穿戴的应用图标1032。The application icon area 102 may contain one or more application icons. For example, application icon 1021 of smart home, application icon 1022 of AI speaker, application icon 1023 of memo, application icon 1024 of computer, application icon 1025 of application store, application icon 1026 of music, application icon 1027 of browser, heart health research The application icon 1028 of the mailbox, the application icon 1029 of the mailbox, the application icon 1030 of the gallery, the application icon 1031 of the settings, and the application icon 1032 of the Huawei Wear.
导航栏103也可包含一个或多个应用图标,例如相机的应用图标1031、拨号的应用图标1032、信息的应用图标1033、联系人的应用图标1034。The navigation bar 103 may also contain one or more application icons, such as an application icon 1031 for camera, an application icon 1032 for dialing, an application icon 1033 for information, and an application icon 1034 for contacts.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10的桌面可包含多个页面,应用图标可分布在这多个页面。用户可以左右滑动,来浏览其他页面中的应用程序图标。页面指示符104可用于指示用户当前浏览的是哪一个页面。例如,如图4所示,页面指示符104指示,当前浏览的页面是最右侧页面,用户可向左滑动以使得第一电子设备10切换显示到另两个左边的页面。In this embodiment of the present application, the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may include multiple pages, and application icons may be distributed on the multiple pages. Users can swipe left and right to browse application icons in other pages. The page indicator 104 may be used to indicate which page the user is currently viewing. For example, as shown in FIG. 4 , the page indicator 104 indicates that the currently browsed page is the rightmost page, and the user can swipe left to make the first electronic device 10 switch to display the other two left pages.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一电子设备10的桌面在多个页面之间切换时,导航栏103可不动。也即是说,多个页面切换时,应用图标区102的应用图标改变。In some embodiments of the present application, when the desktop of the first electronic device 10 is switched between multiple pages, the navigation bar 103 may not move. That is to say, when multiple pages are switched, the application icons in the application icon area 102 are changed.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10的桌面还可包含日历指示符,可用于指示当前时间,例如日期、星期几、时分信息等。第一电子设备10的桌面还可包含天气指示符,可用于指示天气类型,例如多云转晴、小雨等,还可以用于指示气温等信息。In this embodiment of the present application, the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may further include a calendar indicator, which may be used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, and the like. The desktop of the first electronic device 10 may further include a weather indicator, which may be used to indicate the weather type, such as cloudy to sunny, light rain, etc., and may also be used to indicate information such as temperature.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备的桌面布局可包含桌面的页面页数和每页上所容纳图标的最大数量(例如如图4所示,桌面每页上所容纳图标的每行最多4个,最多6列,即最大数量为4×6=24)。在本申请实施例中,每页上所容纳的图标的最大数量可以指应用图标区102上容纳的图标的最大数量。应用图标在桌面上的位置,是指应用图标在该页面上所在的行和列。其中,所在的行从上到下数,所在的列从左到右数。In this embodiment of the present application, the desktop layout of the first electronic device may include the number of pages on the desktop and the maximum number of icons contained on each page (for example, as shown in FIG. , up to 6 columns, that is, the maximum number is 4×6=24). In this embodiment of the present application, the maximum number of icons accommodated on each page may refer to the maximum number of icons accommodated in the application icon area 102 . The location of the application icon on the desktop refers to the row and column where the application icon is located on the page. Among them, the row is counted from top to bottom, and the column is counted from left to right.
例如,如图4所示,智能家居的应用图标1021在该桌面的用户界面100的第1行第1列。AI音箱的应用图标1022、备忘录的应用图标1023和计算机的应用图标1024,分别位于该桌面的用户界面的第1行第2列、第1行第3列、第1行第4列。For example, as shown in FIG. 4 , the application icon 1021 of the smart home is in the first row and the first column of the user interface 100 of the desktop. The application icon 1022 of the AI speaker, the application icon 1023 of the memo, and the application icon 1024 of the computer are respectively located in the first row, the second column, the first row and the third column, and the first row and the fourth column of the user interface of the desktop.
应用商店的应用图标1025、音乐的应用图标1026、浏览器的应用图标1027、心脏健康研究的应用图标1028,分别位于该桌面的用户界面的第2行第1列、第2行第2列、第2行第3列、第2行第4列。The application icon 1025 of the application store, the application icon 1026 of the music, the application icon 1027 of the browser, and the application icon 1028 of the heart health research are respectively located in the second row, the first column, the second row and the second column of the user interface of the desktop. 2nd row 3rd column, 2nd row 4th column.
邮箱的应用图标1029、图库的应用图标1030、设置的应用图标1031和华为穿戴的应用图标1032,分别位于该桌面的用户界面的第3行第1列、第3行第2列、第3行第3列、第3行第4列。The application icon 1029 of the mailbox, the application icon 1030 of the gallery, the application icon 1031 of the settings, and the application icon 1032 of the Huawei Wear are respectively located in the third row, the first column, the third row, the second column, and the third row of the user interface of the desktop. Column 3, row 3, column 4.
相机的应用图标1031、拨号的应用图标1032、信息的应用图标1033、联系人的应用图标1034,分别位于该桌面的用户界面的导航栏103的第1列、第2列、第3列和第4列。The application icon 1031 of the camera, the application icon 1032 of dialing, the application icon 1033 of the message, and the application icon 1034 of the contact are located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the third column of the navigation bar 103 of the user interface of the desktop, respectively. 4 columns.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10可将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。第二电子设备20可接收该第一信息,并按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。重新布局完成后,第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上桌面布局相同,且第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上同 一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同。In the embodiment of the present application, the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the second electronic device 20 . The second electronic device 20 may receive the first information, and lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the desktop layout on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 is the same, and the icon of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 is in the same position on the desktop.
本申请实施例中,应用图标位置可包含第一电子设备10所安装的应用在桌面的应用图标去102的位置和在导航栏103的位置。In this embodiment of the present application, the location of the application icon may include the location on the desktop of the application icon 102 and the location on the navigation bar 103 of the application installed on the first electronic device 10 .
本申请实施例中,第一信息不限于携带应用图标在桌面的位置信息,还可以携带控件在桌面的位置信息。In this embodiment of the present application, the first information is not limited to carrying the location information of the application icon on the desktop, and may also carry the location information of the control on the desktop.
其中,控件可包含小工具(widget),例如日历小工具(用于指示当前时间,例如日期、星期几、时分信息等)、天气小工具(用于指示天气类型,例如多云转晴、小雨等,还可以用于指示气温等信息,还可以用于指示地点)、备忘录小工具(用于展示最近的备忘录信息)。The controls may include widgets, such as calendar widgets (used to indicate the current time, such as date, day of the week, hour and minute information, etc.), weather widgets (used to indicate weather types, such as cloudy to sunny, light rain, etc. , can also be used to indicate temperature and other information, and can also be used to indicate location), memo widget (used to display recent memo information).
控件还可包含负一屏,负一屏是指在设备的桌面左侧的,用于展示信息的屏幕。控件还包含负一屏上的各个功能控件,例如付款码控件、打车控件、物流信息展示控件、机票展示控件等。The control may also include a negative screen, which refers to the screen on the left side of the desktop of the device for displaying information. The controls also include various functional controls on the negative screen, such as payment code controls, taxi controls, logistics information display controls, and air ticket display controls.
控件还可包含控制中心上的功能控件,例如Wi-Fi开关、蓝牙开关、音乐组件(包含开始开关、下一首开关等)、相机开关等。控件还可包含下拉菜单栏上各个功能开关,例如Wi-Fi开关、蓝牙开关、亮度调整控件、模式切换控件(例如在铃声模式、振动模式和静音模式之间切换)。控件还可包含用于实现各种功能的卡片。The controls may also include functional controls on the control center, such as a Wi-Fi switch, a Bluetooth switch, a music component (including a start switch, a next track switch, etc.), a camera switch, and the like. The controls may also include various function switches on the drop-down menu bar, such as Wi-Fi switch, Bluetooth switch, brightness adjustment control, mode switching control (eg, switching between ringer mode, vibrate mode, and silent mode). Controls can also contain cards that implement various functions.
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10可将携带上述控件在桌面的位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。第二电子设备20可按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局,并按照第一信息对相应的控件进行布局。对控件进行布局之后,第二电子设备20上的相应的控件在桌面或者下拉菜单栏的位置与第一电子设备10上相同。In the embodiment of the present application, the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying the position information of the above control on the desktop to the second electronic device 20 . The second electronic device 20 may layout the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information, and layout the corresponding controls according to the first information. After the controls are laid out, the positions of the corresponding controls on the second electronic device 20 on the desktop or the pull-down menu bar are the same as those on the first electronic device 10 .
可以理解的,上述对控件的举例仅用于解释本申请实施例,不应构成限定。本申请实施例中第一信息还可携带其他控件在桌面的位置信息,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that the above examples of controls are only used to explain the embodiments of the present application, and should not be construed as limitations. In this embodiment of the present application, the first information may also carry position information of other controls on the desktop, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
下面结合用户界面介绍一种第一电子设备10向第二电子设备20发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息过程几种示例。Several examples of the process of sending the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the second electronic device 20 from the first electronic device 10 are described below in conjunction with the user interface.
当第一电子设备10上设置界面上设定控件处于打开状态时,第一电子设备10可通过近距离无线通信或者移动通信网络向第二电子设备20发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。下面分别介绍以下情况下所涉及的用户界面:(1)通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi中的一项或多项技术发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。(2)通过NFC技术发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。(3)通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。When the setting control on the setting interface on the first electronic device 10 is in an open state, the first electronic device 10 can send the information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the second electronic device 20 through short-range wireless communication or a mobile communication network. first information. The following describes the user interfaces involved in the following cases: (1) Sending first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through one or more technologies of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi. (2) Sending the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon by using the NFC technology. (3) Sending the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology.
(1)通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi中的一项或多项技术发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息(1) Send first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through one or more technologies in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi
具体的,请参阅图5A~图5D,图5A~图5D是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。图5A所示出用户界面30为第一电子设备10上的设置界面。响应于作用在图4所示用户界面100上设置的应用图标的用户操作,第一电子设备30可显示用户界面300。用户界面30还可以是设置的用户界面的下一级用户界面,本申请实施例对此不作限定。Specifically, please refer to FIGS. 5A to 5D . FIGS. 5A to 5D are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by embodiments of the present application. FIG. 5A shows that the user interface 30 is a setting interface on the first electronic device 10 . The first electronic device 30 may display the user interface 300 in response to a user operation acting on the application icon set on the user interface 100 shown in FIG. 4 . The user interface 30 may also be a next-level user interface of the set user interface, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
如图5A所示,用户界面300可包含桌面布局选项301、锁定布局控件302、自动对齐控件303、智能助手控件304和桌面同步控件305。用户界面300还可包含返回控件306。其中:As shown in FIG. 5A , user interface 300 may include desktop layout options 301 , lock layout controls 302 , auto-align controls 303 , smart assistant controls 304 , and desktop synchronization controls 305 . User interface 300 may also include a return control 306 . in:
返回控件306,用于返回上一级界面。The return control 306 is used to return to the previous interface.
桌面布局选项301,用于设置第一电子设备10的桌面布局,桌面布局例如包含4×6,表 示桌面的一个页面上可布局4行6列的应用图标。桌面布局还可包含5×5、5×6。5×5表示桌面的一个页面上可布局5行5列的应用图标,5×6表示桌面的一个页面上可布局5行6列的应用图标。The desktop layout option 301 is used to set the desktop layout of the first electronic device 10. The desktop layout includes, for example, 4×6, indicating that application icons in 4 rows and 6 columns can be laid out on one page of the desktop. The desktop layout may also include 5×5 and 5×6. 5×5 means that 5 rows and 5 columns of application icons can be laid out on one page of the desktop, and 5×6 means that 5 rows and 6 columns of application icons can be laid out on one page of the desktop .
锁定布局控件302,用于将第一电子设备10的上当前桌面的布局和应用图标的位置锁定。桌面的布局和应用图标的位置锁定后,桌面上的应用图标不能被移动、删除,对应的应用也不能被卸载。The lock layout control 302 is used to lock the layout of the current desktop and the position of the application icon on the first electronic device 10 . After the layout of the desktop and the location of the application icons are locked, the application icons on the desktop cannot be moved or deleted, and the corresponding applications cannot be uninstalled.
智能助手控件304,用于开启第一电子设备10的桌面的最左屏显示,开启后第一电子设备10可在最左屏显示快递信息、运动步数信息、搜索框等。The smart assistant control 304 is used to enable the display on the leftmost screen of the desktop of the first electronic device 10 . After opening, the first electronic device 10 can display express information, exercise steps information, search box, etc. on the leftmost screen.
桌面同步控件305,用于跨设备同步应用图标的位置和桌面布局。The desktop synchronization control 305 is used for synchronizing the position of the application icon and the desktop layout across devices.
本申请实施例中,桌面同步控件305可包含开启状态和关闭状态。响应于作用在桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10可在用户界面300上将桌面同步控件305在开启状态和关闭状态之间切换。In this embodiment of the present application, the desktop synchronization control 305 may include an on state and an off state. In response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 , the first electronic device 10 may switch the desktop synchronization control 305 between an on state and an off state on the user interface 300 .
如图5A和图5B所示,桌面同步控件305处于关闭状态,响应于作用在桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10可在用户界面300上将桌面同步控件305显示为开启状态。As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B , the desktop synchronization control 305 is in a closed state, and in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 , the first electronic device 10 may display the desktop synchronization control 305 in an open state on the user interface 300 .
本申请实施例中,响应于作用在桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10还可显示用户界面400。如图5C所示,用户界面400可包含同步内容选择区401和同步方式选择区402。In this embodiment of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 , the first electronic device 10 may further display a user interface 400 . As shown in FIG. 5C , the user interface 400 may include a synchronization content selection area 401 and a synchronization method selection area 402 .
同步内容选择区401可包含应用图标选择区4012和全选控件4011。其中,应用图标选择区4012可包含第一电子设备10所安装应用的图标。这些应用图标可包含选中状态和未选中状态。其中,应用图标选择区4012处于选中状态的应用图标在桌面上的位置将发送出去。全选控件4011也可包含选中状态和未选中状态。The synchronization content selection area 401 may include an application icon selection area 4012 and a select-all control 4011 . The application icon selection area 4012 may include icons of applications installed on the first electronic device 10 . These app icons can have checked and unchecked states. The position on the desktop of the application icon in the selected state in the application icon selection area 4012 will be sent out. The select all control 4011 may also contain a checked state and an unchecked state.
全选控件4011处于选中状态时,应用图标选择区4012的应用图标均处于选中状态。响应于作用在全选控件4011的用户操作,第一电子设备10将全选控件4011由选中状态显示为非选中状态,且第一电子设备10将应用图标选择区4012中的应用图标均由选中状态显示为非选中状态。响应于作用在应用图标选择区4012中应用图标的用户操作,第一电子设备将该应用图标有未选中状态显示为选中状态。When the select all control 4011 is in the selected state, the application icons in the application icon selection area 4012 are all in the selected state. In response to the user operation acting on the select-all control 4011, the first electronic device 10 displays the select-all control 4011 from the selected state to the non-selected state, and the first electronic device 10 displays all the application icons in the application icon selection area 4012 from the selected state. The status is displayed as unchecked. In response to the user operation acting on the application icon in the application icon selection area 4012, the first electronic device displays the unselected state of the application icon as the selected state.
同步方式选择区402,可用于显示多个发送应用图标在桌面上的位置的方式。如图5C所示,同步方式选择区402可包含极速分享控件4021、微信分享控件4022、QQ分享控件4023、推特分享控件4024、脸书分享控件4025、邮件分享控件4026、WLAN直连分享控件4027、备忘录分享控件4028、蓝牙分享控件4029。不限于示例列出的同步方式,响应于作用在同步方式选择区402的滑动操作,第一电子设备10可显示更多分享控件。其中:The synchronization mode selection area 402 can be used to display multiple modes for sending the positions of the application icons on the desktop. As shown in FIG. 5C , the synchronization method selection area 402 may include a speed sharing control 4021, a WeChat sharing control 4022, a QQ sharing control 4023, a Twitter sharing control 4024, a Facebook sharing control 4025, an email sharing control 4026, and a WLAN direct sharing control 4027, a memo sharing control 4028, and a Bluetooth sharing control 4029. Not limited to the synchronization methods listed in the example, in response to a sliding operation acting on the synchronization method selection area 402, the first electronic device 10 may display more sharing controls. in:
微信分享控件4022、QQ分享控件4023、推特分享控件4024、脸书分享控件4025、邮件分享控件4026,可用于通过对应的通信应用(微信应用、QQ应用、推特应用、脸书应用、邮件应用)将处于选中状态的应用图标在桌面上的位置以及桌面布局发送出去。 WeChat sharing control 4022, QQ sharing control 4023, Twitter sharing control 4024, Facebook sharing control 4025, Email sharing control 4026, which can be used to pass the corresponding communication applications (WeChat application, QQ application, Twitter application, Facebook application, Email application) application) sends the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout.
备忘录分享控件4028,可用于将处于选中状态的应用图标在桌面上的位置以及桌面布局通过备忘录应用记录,并可通过备忘录应用传输给云端设备或者其他终端设备。The memo sharing control 4028 can be used to record the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through the memo application, and can be transmitted to the cloud device or other terminal device through the memo application.
WLAN直连分享控件4027,可用于将处于选中状态的应用图标在桌面上的位置以及桌面布局通过WLAN直连分享出去。蓝牙分享控件4029,可用于将处于选中状态的应用图标在桌面上的位置以及桌面布局通过蓝牙分享出去。极速分享控件4021,可用于将处于选中状态的应用图标在桌面上的位置以及桌面布局通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi结合分享出去。下面以极速分享控件4021为例介绍,蓝牙分享控件4029和WLAN直连分享控件4027类似。The Wi-Fi Direct sharing control 4027 can be used to share the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through Wi-Fi Direct. The Bluetooth sharing control 4029 can be used to share the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through Bluetooth. The speed sharing control 4021 can be used to share the position of the selected application icon on the desktop and the desktop layout through a combination of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi. The speed sharing control 4021 is used as an example to introduce below. The Bluetooth sharing control 4029 is similar to the WLAN direct sharing control 4027 .
极速分享控件4021,还可提示“点击此处开启WLAN和蓝牙,无需流量,极速分享”。The speed sharing control 4021 can also prompt "Click here to turn on WLAN and Bluetooth, no traffic, speed sharing".
响应于作用在极速分享控件4021的用户操作,当Wi-Fi开关关闭时第一电子设备10可开启Wi-Fi开关,当蓝牙开关关闭时第一电子设备10还可开启蓝牙开关。蓝牙开关和Wi-Fi开关开启后,第一电子设备10的蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块处于工作状态。In response to a user operation acting on the speed sharing control 4021, the first electronic device 10 can turn on the Wi-Fi switch when the Wi-Fi switch is turned off, and the first electronic device 10 can turn on the Bluetooth switch when the Bluetooth switch is turned off. After the Bluetooth switch and the Wi-Fi switch are turned on, the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module of the first electronic device 10 are in a working state.
第一电子设备10可通过蓝牙搜索周边设备。The first electronic device 10 can search for peripheral devices through Bluetooth.
本申请实施例中,当用户想要通过另一设备(例如第二电子设备20)接收第一电子设备10发送的应用图标的位置和桌面布局时,用户可通过用户操作将第二电子设备20的极速分享开关打开,具体可参考图6B和图6C所示出极速分享开关的描述。第二电子设备20的极速分享开关打开后,第二电子设备20可发送蓝牙广播或Wi-Fi广播。该蓝牙广播和Wi-Fi广播可携带第二电子设备20的媒体存取控制(media access control,MAC)地址和设备标识(设备标识例如Lisa的手机)。In this embodiment of the present application, when the user wants to receive the location and desktop layout of the application icon sent by the first electronic device 10 through another device (for example, the second electronic device 20 ), the user can set the second electronic device 20 to The speed sharing switch is turned on. For details, please refer to the description of the speed sharing switch shown in FIG. 6B and FIG. 6C . After the speed sharing switch of the second electronic device 20 is turned on, the second electronic device 20 can send a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast. The Bluetooth broadcast and the Wi-Fi broadcast can carry a media access control (media access control, MAC) address and a device identification (a device identification such as Lisa's mobile phone) of the second electronic device 20 .
第一电子设备10在进行搜索时,可接收到第二电子设备20发送的蓝牙广播或Wi-Fi广播,即搜索到第二电子设备20。第一电子设备10可根据接收到的第二电子设备20的广播将第二电子设备20的设备标识显示出来。When searching, the first electronic device 10 may receive the Bluetooth broadcast or Wi-Fi broadcast sent by the second electronic device 20 , that is, the second electronic device 20 is searched. The first electronic device 10 may display the device identification of the second electronic device 20 according to the received broadcast of the second electronic device 20 .
示例性的,如图5D所示,第一电子设备10显示搜索到的设备的设备标识。搜索到的设备的设备标识包含设备标识403和设备标识404。设备标识403可提示“显示器”。设备标识404可提示“Lisa的手机”。设备标识404可以是第二电子设备20的设备标识。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 5D , the first electronic device 10 displays the device identification of the searched device. The device identification of the searched device includes a device identification 403 and a device identification 404 . Device identification 403 may prompt "display". Device identification 404 may prompt "Lisa's Cell Phone". The device identification 404 may be the device identification of the second electronic device 20 .
用户可触摸设备标识404,以将第一电子设备10的应用图标的位置和桌面布局发送给该设备标识404对应的设备(即第二电子设备20)。The user can touch the device identifier 404 to send the location and desktop layout of the application icon of the first electronic device 10 to the device corresponding to the device identifier 404 (ie, the second electronic device 20 ).
响应于作用在设备标识404的用户操作,第一电子设备10向第二电子设备20发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。具体的,第一电子设备10可通过蓝牙广播上携带的MAC地址向第二电子设备10发送该第一信息。第一电子设备10可通过WLAN直连发送该第一信息。In response to the user operation acting on the device identification 404 , the first electronic device 10 sends the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the application icon position information to the second electronic device 20 . Specifically, the first electronic device 10 may send the first information to the second electronic device 10 through the MAC address carried on the Bluetooth broadcast. The first electronic device 10 may send the first information through the WLAN direct connection.
请参阅图6A~图6D,图6A~图6D是本申请实施例提供的一些第二电子设备20的用户界面示意图。Please refer to FIGS. 6A to 6D . FIGS. 6A to 6D are schematic diagrams of user interfaces of some second electronic devices 20 provided by embodiments of the present application.
如图6A所示出的用户界面200为第二电子设备20的桌面的用户界面示意图。如图6A所示,第二电子设备20上该用户界面200也可包含:状态栏201,应用图标区202,导航栏203。其中:The user interface 200 shown in FIG. 6A is a schematic diagram of the user interface of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 . As shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface 200 on the second electronic device 20 may also include: a status bar 201 , an application icon area 202 , and a navigation bar 203 . in:
状态栏201可参考前述图4中状态栏101的描述。应用图标区202可包含AI音箱的应用图标2021、图库的应用图标2022、设置的应用图标2023、华为穿戴的应用图标2024、浏览器的应用图标2025、邮箱的应用图标2026、音乐的应用图标2027、备忘录的应用图标2028、心脏健康研究的应用图标2029和应用商店的应用图标2020。For the status bar 201, reference may be made to the description of the status bar 101 in FIG. 4 above. The application icon area 202 may include the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker, the application icon 2022 of the gallery, the application icon 2023 of the setting, the application icon 2024 of the Huawei wear, the application icon 2025 of the browser, the application icon 2026 of the mailbox, and the application icon 2027 of the music. , Memo's app icon 2028, Heart Health Research's app icon 2029, and App Store's app icon 2020.
导航栏203可包含一个或多个应用图标,例如信息的应用图标2031、联系人的应用图标2032、相机的应用图标2033、拨号的应用图标2034。The navigation bar 203 may contain one or more application icons, such as an application icon 2031 for information, an application icon 2032 for contacts, an application icon 2033 for camera, and an application icon 2034 for dialing.
在本申请的一些实施例中,如图6A所示,第二电子设备20的桌面的页面页数可以是1页。In some embodiments of the present application, as shown in FIG. 6A , the number of pages of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may be 1 page.
可以理解的是,图6A仅仅示例性示出了第二电子设备20的用户界面,不应构成对本申请实施例的限定。It can be understood that FIG. 6A only exemplarily shows the user interface of the second electronic device 20 , and should not constitute a limitation to the embodiments of the present application.
如图6A和图6B所示,响应于作用在图6A所描述用户界面中状态栏201的下拉操作,第二电子设备20显示图6B所示用户界面500。如图6B所示,用户界面500可包括多个开关, 多个开关中可包含WLAN开关、蓝牙开关、手电筒开关、自动旋转开关、截屏开关、飞行模式开关、移动数据开关、位置信息开关、护眼模式开关、热点开关、屏幕录制开关、大屏投射开关、NFC开关503等。As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B , in response to a pull-down operation on the status bar 201 in the user interface depicted in FIG. 6A , the second electronic device 20 displays the user interface 500 shown in FIG. 6B . As shown in FIG. 6B, the user interface 500 may include a plurality of switches, and the plurality of switches may include a WLAN switch, a Bluetooth switch, a flashlight switch, an automatic rotation switch, a screen capture switch, an airplane mode switch, a mobile data switch, a location information switch, a Eye mode switch, hotspot switch, screen recording switch, large screen projection switch, NFC switch 503, etc.
如图6B所示,用户界面500还可包含极速分享控件501。第二电子设备20可响应于作用在该极速分享控件501的用户操作,将该极速分享控件501在开启状态和关闭状态之间切换。例如,如图6B和图6C所示,极速分享控件501处于关闭状态,响应于作用在极速分享控件501的用户操作,第二电子设备20将该极速分享控件501从关闭状态切换到开启状态。极速分享控件处于开启状态下,第二电子设备20可发送蓝牙广播,以被周围的设备搜索到。不限于蓝牙广播,第二电子设备20还可以发送Wi-Fi广播。As shown in FIG. 6B , the user interface 500 may also include a speed sharing control 501 . The second electronic device 20 can switch the speed sharing control 501 between an on state and an off state in response to a user operation acting on the speed sharing control 501 . For example, as shown in FIGS. 6B and 6C , the speed sharing control 501 is in an off state, and in response to a user operation acting on the speed sharing control 501 , the second electronic device 20 switches the speed sharing control 501 from the off state to the on state. When the speed sharing control is turned on, the second electronic device 20 can send a Bluetooth broadcast to be searched by surrounding devices. Not limited to Bluetooth broadcast, the second electronic device 20 may also transmit Wi-Fi broadcast.
可以理解的,本申请实施例以极速分享开关在用户界面500上举例说明,但是本申请实施例对极速分享开关所在的界面不作限制,例如,极速分享开关还可以在设置界面。It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application uses the speed sharing switch as an example on the user interface 500, but the embodiment of the present application does not limit the interface where the speed sharing switch is located. For example, the speed sharing switch can also be in the setting interface.
该蓝牙广播和Wi-Fi广播可携带第二电子设备20的媒体存取控制MAC地址和设备标识(设备标识例如Lisa的手机)。The Bluetooth broadcast and the Wi-Fi broadcast can carry the MAC address of the second electronic device 20 and the device identification (the device identification is, for example, Lisa's mobile phone).
第一电子设备10在进行搜索时,可接收到第二电子设备20发送的蓝牙广播或Wi-Fi广播,即搜索到第二电子设备20。第一电子设备10可根据接收到的第二电子设备20的广播将第二电子设备20的设备标识显示出来。When searching, the first electronic device 10 may receive the Bluetooth broadcast or Wi-Fi broadcast sent by the second electronic device 20 , that is, the second electronic device 20 is searched. The first electronic device 10 may display the device identification of the second electronic device 20 according to the received broadcast of the second electronic device 20 .
本申请实施例中,当第二电子设备20接收到来自第一电子设备的第一信息时,第二电子设备20可在用户界面50显示提示框502。第一信息可携带第一电子设备的桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息。如图6C所示,提示框502可包含提示5021、拒绝控件5022和接受控件5023。其中:In this embodiment of the present application, when the second electronic device 20 receives the first information from the first electronic device, the second electronic device 20 may display a prompt box 502 on the user interface 50 . The first information may carry desktop layout information and application icon location information of the first electronic device. As shown in FIG. 6C , prompt box 502 may include prompt 5021 , reject control 5022 and accept control 5023 . in:
提示5021可提示“接收到桌面同步请求”。Prompt 5021 may prompt "Desktop sync request received".
拒绝控件5022,可用于第二电子设备20拒绝按照接收的第一信息,重新进行应用图标在桌面上的布局。The reject control 5022 can be used for the second electronic device 20 to reject the re-layout of the application icon on the desktop according to the received first information.
接受控件5023,用于第二电子设备20按照接收的第一信息,重新进行应用图标在桌面上的布局。The accepting control 5023 is used for the second electronic device 20 to redo the layout of the application icons on the desktop according to the received first information.
本申请实施例不限于第二电子设备20将提示框502显示在用户界面500上。该提示框还可以是显示在任意用户界面上。当第二电子设备20显示任何用户界面时,第二电子设备20均可根据接收的第一信息显示该提示框502。This embodiment of the present application is not limited to displaying the prompt box 502 on the user interface 500 by the second electronic device 20 . The prompt box can also be displayed on any user interface. When the second electronic device 20 displays any user interface, the second electronic device 20 can display the prompt box 502 according to the received first information.
示例性的,响应于作用在接受控件5023的用户操作,第二电子设备20接收第一信息,并按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。按照第一信息对所安装的应用图标在桌面上之后,如图6D所示,第二电子设备20显示用户已重新布局的桌面。Exemplarily, in response to a user operation acting on the accept control 5023, the second electronic device 20 receives the first information, and lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the installed application icons are placed on the desktop according to the first information, as shown in FIG. 6D , the second electronic device 20 displays the desktop that has been rearranged by the user.
本申请实施例中,第二电子设备20按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。重新布局完成后,第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上同一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同。In the embodiment of the present application, the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the rearrangement is completed, the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in the same position on the desktop.
例如,如图6D所描述示例中,第二电子设备20按照该第一信息对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局之后,第二电子设备20的桌面上也可包含3页。但左边两页由于无应用图标分布,第二电子设备20的桌面也可仅包含一个页面。重新布局之后,在该页面上,每个应用图标所在的位置与第一电子设备10上该相同的应用图标的位置相同。For example, in the example described in FIG. 6D , after the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the first information, the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may also include 3 pages. However, since no application icons are distributed on the two pages on the left, the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may also include only one page. After the rearrangement, on the page, the position of each application icon is the same as the position of the same application icon on the first electronic device 10 .
具体的,重新布局之后,如图6D和图4所示,在第二电子设备20的桌面上,AI音箱的应用图标2021位于第1行第2列,与第一电子设备10上AI音箱的应用图标1022的位置相 同。即第一电子设备10上AI音箱的图标1022也位于第1行第2列。重新布局之后,在第二电子设备20的桌面上,图库的应用图标2022位于第3行第2列,与第一电子设备10上图库应用的图标1030的位置相同。重新布局之后,类似地,在第二电子设备20的桌面上,设置的应用图标2023、华为穿戴的应用图标2024、浏览器的应用图标2025、邮箱的应用图标2026、音乐的应用图标2027、备忘录的应用图标2028、心脏健康研究的应用图标2029、应用商店的应用图标2020与第一电子设备上相同应用图标的位置相同。Specifically, after the rearrangement, as shown in FIG. 6D and FIG. 4 , on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 , the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 . The location of the application icon 1022 is the same. That is, the icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 is also located in the first row and the second column. After the rearrangement, on the desktop of the second electronic device 20, the application icon 2022 of the gallery is located in the third row and the second column, which is the same as the location of the icon 1030 of the gallery application on the first electronic device 10. After the rearrangement, similarly, on the desktop of the second electronic device 20, the set application icon 2023, the Huawei wear application icon 2024, the browser application icon 2025, the mailbox application icon 2026, the music application icon 2027, the memo The application icon 2028 of , the application icon 2029 of the heart health research, and the application icon 2020 of the application store are in the same location as the same application icon on the first electronic device.
类似的,重新布局之后,如图6D和图4所示,第二电子设备20的桌面的导航栏203中应用图标与第一电子设备上相同应用图标的位置相同。相机的应用图标2033、拨号的应用图标2034、信息的应用图标2031、联系人的应用图标2032,分别位于第二电子设备桌面的导航栏203的第1列、第2列、第3列和第4列。这与第一电子设备10的桌面导航栏103中相同应用图标的位置相同。Similarly, after the rearrangement, as shown in FIG. 6D and FIG. 4 , the location of the application icon in the navigation bar 203 of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device. The application icon 2033 of the camera, the application icon 2034 of the dial, the application icon 2031 of the information, and the application icon 2032 of the contact are located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the third column of the navigation bar 203 on the desktop of the second electronic device, respectively. 4 columns. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the desktop navigation bar 103 of the first electronic device 10 .
这样,第二电子设备20的桌面上应用图标,可根据用户操作按照第一电子设备10上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备10上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备20时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备20桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。In this way, the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device 10 according to the user operation. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device 10 are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device 20, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
(2)通过NFC技术发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息(2) Sending first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through NFC technology
在本申请的另一些实施例中,第一电子设备可通过NFC技术将第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。In other embodiments of the present application, the first electronic device may send the first information to the second electronic device 20 through the NFC technology.
示例性的,请参阅图7,图7是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图7中的(A)所示,第一电子设备10的用户界面300中,桌面同步控件305处于关闭状态,响应于作用在桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10可在用户界面300上将桌面同步控件305显示为开启状态。For example, please refer to FIG. 7 , which is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application. As shown in (A) of FIG. 7 , in the user interface 300 of the first electronic device 10, the desktop synchronization control 305 is in a closed state, and in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305, the first electronic device 10 can On the interface 300, the desktop synchronization control 305 is displayed in an open state.
本申请实施例中,响应于作用在图7中(A)所示桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10还可显示用户界面600。如图7中的(B)所示,用户界面600可包含提示601、帮助控件602和取消控件603。In this embodiment of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 shown in (A) of FIG. 7 , the first electronic device 10 may further display a user interface 600 . As shown in (B) of FIG. 7 , the user interface 600 may include a prompt 601 , a help control 602 and a cancel control 603 .
提示601可提示“请将需同步桌面图标布局的设备的NFC打开,并与本设备碰一碰”。The prompt 601 may prompt "Please turn on the NFC of the device whose desktop icon layout needs to be synchronized, and touch this device".
在本申请的一些实施例中,响应于作用在图7中(A)所示桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10可开启NFC开关。NFC开关打开后,NFC模块开启,第一电子设备10可通过NFC模块与另一设备进行交互数据。在另一些实施例中,第一电子设备10上的NFC开关需手动打开。第一电子设备10的NFC开关类似第二电子设备20。In some embodiments of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 shown in (A) of FIG. 7 , the first electronic device 10 may turn on the NFC switch. After the NFC switch is turned on, the NFC module is turned on, and the first electronic device 10 can exchange data with another device through the NFC module. In other embodiments, the NFC switch on the first electronic device 10 needs to be manually turned on. The NFC switch of the first electronic device 10 is similar to the second electronic device 20 .
帮助控件602,可用于提示打开NFC并通过NFC传输的具体操作流程。响应于作用在帮助控件602的用户操作,第一电子设备10可显示打开NFC并通过NFC传输的具体操作流程。The help control 602 can be used to prompt the specific operation process of turning on NFC and transmitting through NFC. In response to a user operation acting on the help control 602, the first electronic device 10 may display a specific operation flow of turning on the NFC and transmitting through the NFC.
取消控件603,用于取消传输第一消息。The cancel control 603 is used to cancel the transmission of the first message.
在本申请实施例中,用户可手动打开第二电子设备20的NFC开关。具体的,如图6B所示,第二电子设备20上NFC开关503可处于关闭状态,响应于作用在NFC开关503的用户操作,第二电子设备20可将NFC开关503从关闭状态切换显示为开启状态。NFC开关503处于开启状态时,第二电子设备20上NFC模块处于工作状态。第二电子设备20可通过NFC模块与其他电子设备(例如第一电子设备10)传输数据。In this embodiment of the present application, the user can manually turn on the NFC switch of the second electronic device 20 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6B , the NFC switch 503 on the second electronic device 20 may be in an off state, and in response to a user operation acting on the NFC switch 503 , the second electronic device 20 may switch the NFC switch 503 from the off state to display as On state. When the NFC switch 503 is in an on state, the NFC module on the second electronic device 20 is in a working state. The second electronic device 20 can transmit data with other electronic devices (eg, the first electronic device 10 ) through the NFC module.
如图7中的(C)所示,第二电子设备20的NFC开关开启之后,第二电子设备20可与第一电子设备10接触(即碰一碰)。当第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20接触时,第一电子设备10可通过NFC通信将送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第 二电子设备20。As shown in (C) of FIG. 7 , after the NFC switch of the second electronic device 20 is turned on, the second electronic device 20 can contact (ie, touch) the first electronic device 10 . When the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are in contact, the first electronic device 10 can send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through NFC communication.
第二电子设备20接收到第一信息后,第二电子设备20可按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。如图7中的(D)所示,重新布局完成后,第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上桌面布局相同,且第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上同一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同。关于图7中的(D)所示出的用户界面200可参考图6D中的用户界面200的描述,这里不再赘述。After the second electronic device 20 receives the first information, the second electronic device 20 may lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. As shown in (D) of FIG. 7 , after the rearrangement is completed, the desktop layout of the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are the same, and the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in The same position on the desktop. Regarding the user interface 200 shown in (D) in FIG. 7 , reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D , which will not be repeated here.
(3)通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息(3) Sending first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information through cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology
本申请实施例中,携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息可以是在用户界面300(设置界面)上响应于用户操作发送的。In this embodiment of the present application, the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information may be sent on the user interface 300 (setting interface) in response to a user operation.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,当同一账号(例如华为账号)被多个设备(例如第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20)登陆时,第一电子设备10或者第二电子设备20可显示提示界面,以提示用户可进行桌面同步(即通过携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息调整桌面布局)。该提示界面上可响应于用户操作,使得第一电子设备10发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。下面分别介绍。In other embodiments of the present application, when the same account (eg, Huawei account) is logged in by multiple devices (eg, the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 ), the first electronic device 10 or the second electronic device 20 A prompt interface can be displayed to prompt the user that desktop synchronization is possible (ie, the desktop layout can be adjusted by carrying the first information of the desktop layout information and the application icon position information). On the prompt interface, in response to a user operation, the first electronic device 10 can send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon. They are introduced separately below.
(a)设置界面300上用户操作触发桌面上应用图标同步(a) User operation on setting interface 300 triggers synchronization of application icons on the desktop
示例一:摇一摇传输第一信息Example 1: Shake to transmit the first message
请参阅图8,图8是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图8中的(A)所示,第一电子设备10的用户界面300中,桌面同步控件305处于关闭状态,响应于作用在桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10可在用户界面300上将桌面同步控件305显示为开启状态。用户界面300可参考图5A所描述用户界面。Please refer to FIG. 8. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) of FIG. 8 , in the user interface 300 of the first electronic device 10, the desktop synchronization control 305 is in a closed state, and in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305, the first electronic device 10 can On the interface 300, the desktop synchronization control 305 is displayed in an open state. User interface 300 may be described with reference to FIG. 5A.
本申请实施例中,响应于作用在图8中(A)所示桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10还可显示用户界面700。如图8中的(B)所示,用户界面700可包含提示701、帮助控件702和取消控件703。In this embodiment of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 shown in (A) of FIG. 8 , the first electronic device 10 may further display a user interface 700 . As shown in (B) of FIG. 8 , the user interface 700 may include a prompt 701 , a help control 702 and a cancel control 703 .
提示701可提示“请摇一摇本设备和需同步桌面图标布局的设备”。The prompt 701 may prompt "Please shake this device and the device whose desktop icon layout needs to be synchronized".
在本申请的一些实施例中,响应于作用在图8中(A)所示桌面同步控件305的用户操作,第一电子设备10可通过加速度传感器检测数据并根据检测到的数据确定第一电子设备10是否进行了摇动。在本申请实施例中,第二电子设备20的设置界面上的桌面同步控件也可处于开启状态。第二电子设备20的设置界面上的桌面同步控件参考第一电子设备10的用户界面30上的桌面同步控件305。设置界面上的桌面同步控件处于开启状态时,第二电子设备20也可通过加速度传感器检测数据并根据检测到的数据确定第一电子设备10是否进行了摇动。In some embodiments of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the desktop synchronization control 305 shown in (A) in FIG. 8 , the first electronic device 10 may detect data through an acceleration sensor and determine the first electronic device according to the detected data. Whether the device 10 has been shaken. In this embodiment of the present application, the desktop synchronization control on the setting interface of the second electronic device 20 may also be in an enabled state. The desktop synchronization control on the setting interface of the second electronic device 20 refers to the desktop synchronization control 305 on the user interface 30 of the first electronic device 10 . When the desktop synchronization control on the setting interface is on, the second electronic device 20 can also detect data through the acceleration sensor and determine whether the first electronic device 10 is shaken according to the detected data.
帮助控件702,可用于提示具体操作流程。响应于作用在帮助控件702的用户操作,第一电子设备10可显示用户操作以传输第一消息的具体操作流程。The help control 702 can be used to prompt a specific operation flow. In response to a user operation acting on the help control 702, the first electronic device 10 may display a specific operation flow of the user operation to transmit the first message.
取消控件703,用于取消传输第一消息。Cancel control 703 for canceling transmission of the first message.
如图8中的(B)和图8中的(C)所示,第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20的设置界面的桌面同步控件均处于开启状态之后,用户可手持两个电子设备晃动(即摇一摇)。第一电子设备10可通过加速度传感器检测到的数据确定第一电子设备10进行了晃动,并通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术将指示第一电子设备10晃动的通知发送给服务器。类似地,服务器也可接收到指示第二电子设备10晃动的通知。则服务器可指示第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20之间传输数据,从而第一电子设备10可将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息 的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。As shown in FIG. 8(B) and FIG. 8(C) , after the desktop synchronization controls of the setting interface of the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are both turned on, the user can hold the two electronic devices Shake (ie shake). The first electronic device 10 may determine that the first electronic device 10 is shaking through data detected by the acceleration sensor, and send a notification indicating that the first electronic device 10 is shaking to the server through the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology. Similarly, the server may also receive a notification indicating that the second electronic device 10 is shaking. Then the server can instruct the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 to transmit data, so that the first electronic device 10 can send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20.
第二电子设备20接收到第一信息后,第二电子设备20可按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。如图8中的(D)所示,重新布局完成后,第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上同一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同。关于图7中的(D)所示出的用户界面200可参考图6D中的用户界面200的描述,这里不再赘述。After the second electronic device 20 receives the first information, the second electronic device 20 may lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information. As shown in (D) of FIG. 8 , after the rearrangement is completed, the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are in the same position on the desktop. Regarding the user interface 200 shown in (D) in FIG. 7 , reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D , which will not be repeated here.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第二电子设备20在接收到第一信息后,可显示提示和接受控件。该提示可指示已接收到新的桌面布局和图标位置信息。响应于作用在接受控件的用户操作,第二电子设备20才执行按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。In some embodiments of the present application, after receiving the first information, the second electronic device 20 may display a prompt and an acceptance control. The prompt may indicate that new desktop layout and icon location information has been received. In response to the user operation acting on the accepting control, the second electronic device 20 executes the layout of the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information.
可以理解的,本申请实施例以摇一摇场景传输第一消息使用蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术为例进行介绍,但是不限于蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术,还可以是通过短距离无线通信(例如蓝牙、WiFi中的一个或多个)技术,本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application is introduced by taking the shaking scene to transmit the first message using cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology as an example, but it is not limited to cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology, and it can also be through short-range wireless communication ( For example, one or more technologies of Bluetooth and WiFi) are not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
示例二:通过微信、QQ等通信软件传输第一信息Example 2: Transmission of the first information through communication software such as WeChat and QQ
以微信为例介绍,请参阅图9,图9是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图9中的(A)所示,第一电子设备10显示用户界面400,用户界面400的描述可参考图5C的描述。响应于作用在微信分析控件4022的用户操作,第一电子设备10可显示用户界面704。用户界面704为微信应用的用户界面。第一电子设备10可登陆第一微信账号。如图9中的(B)所示,用户界面704可包含搜索框7041、联系人列表7042。其中:Taking WeChat as an example, please refer to FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application. As shown in (A) of FIG. 9 , the first electronic device 10 displays a user interface 400 , and the description of the user interface 400 may refer to the description of FIG. 5C . In response to a user operation acting on the WeChat analytics control 4022, the first electronic device 10 may display the user interface 704. The user interface 704 is the user interface of the WeChat application. The first electronic device 10 can log in to the first WeChat account. As shown in (B) of FIG. 9 , the user interface 704 may include a search box 7041 and a contact list 7042 . in:
搜索框7041,可用于搜索联系人。 Search box 7041, which can be used to search for contacts.
联系人列表7041可包含一个或多个联系人。如图9中的(B)所示,联系人列表7041可包含文件传输助手70421。 Contact list 7041 may contain one or more contacts. As shown in (B) of FIG. 9 , the contact list 7041 may contain a file transfer assistant 70421 .
响应于作用在文件传输助手70421的用户操作,第一电子设备10可利用蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息传输给登陆第一微信账号的设备(例如第二电子设备20)。In response to the user operation acting on the file transfer assistant 70421, the first electronic device 10 can utilize the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology to transmit the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon to the device logging in the first WeChat account ( For example the second electronic device 20).
响应于作用在文件传输助手70421的用户操作,第一电子设备10可显示用户界面705。如图9中的(C)所示,用户界面705为微信应用的对话框界面。用户界面705可包含返回控件7051、指示第一信息的提示7052、对话框7053。其中:In response to a user operation acting on the file transfer assistant 70421, the first electronic device 10 may display the user interface 705. As shown in (C) of FIG. 9 , the user interface 705 is a dialog interface of the WeChat application. The user interface 705 may include a return control 7051 , a prompt 7052 indicating the first information, a dialog 7053 . in:
返回控件7051,用于返回用户界面705的上一级界面。The return control 7051 is used to return to the previous interface of the user interface 705 .
提示7052,指示第一信息。Prompt 7052, indicating the first information.
对话框7053,用于输入文字消息、表情消息等。A dialog box 7053 is used to input text messages, emoticon messages, etc.
第一电子设备10将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息传输给登陆第一微信账号的设备(例如第二电子设备20)后,第二电子设备20可通过第一信息重新布局桌面应用图标。After the first electronic device 10 transmits the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the device (eg, the second electronic device 20 ) that logs in to the first WeChat account, the second electronic device 20 can be rearranged through the first information Desktop application icon.
请参阅图10,图10是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图10中的(A)所示,第二电子设备20也可登录第一微信账号。第二电子设备20可显示微信应用的对话框界面,即用户界面706。用户界面706可包含返回控件7061、指示第一信息的提示7062、对话框7063。其中:Please refer to FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) of FIG. 10 , the second electronic device 20 can also log in to the first WeChat account. The second electronic device 20 can display a dialog interface of the WeChat application, namely the user interface 706 . The user interface 706 may include a return control 7061 , a prompt 7062 indicating the first information, a dialog 7063 . in:
返回控件7061,用于返回用户界面706的上一级界面。The return control 7061 is used to return to the previous interface of the user interface 706 .
提示7062,指示第一信息。Prompt 7062, indicating the first information.
对话框7063,用于输入文字消息、表情消息等。A dialog box 7063 is used to input text messages, emoticon messages, etc.
响应于作用在提示7062的用户操作,第二电子设备20显示用户界面707。如图10中的(B)所示,用户界面707包含提示7071、取消控件7072和接受控件7073。其中:In response to the user operation acting on the prompt 7062 , the second electronic device 20 displays the user interface 707 . As shown in (B) of FIG. 10 , the user interface 707 includes a prompt 7071 , a cancel control 7072 and an accept control 7073 . in:
提示7071,可提示“是否同步桌面布局和应用图标位置?”。Prompt 7071 can prompt "Do you want to synchronize desktop layout and application icon position?".
取消控件7072,可用于取消重新布局桌面的应用图标。响应于作用在取消控件7072的用户操作,第二电子设备20关闭用户界面707,返回用户界面706。Cancel control 7072, which can be used to cancel the application icons from rearranging the desktop. In response to the user operation acting on the cancel control 7072 , the second electronic device 20 closes the user interface 707 and returns to the user interface 706 .
接受控件7073,用于第二电子设备20按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。在一种可能的实施例中,图10中的(A)所描述实施例中,第二电子设备20可仅获得指示第一信息的链接。响应于作用在接受控件7073的用户操作,第二电子设备20可接收第一信息,并按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。Accept control 7073 for the second electronic device 20 to lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information. In a possible embodiment, in the embodiment described in (A) of FIG. 10 , the second electronic device 20 may only obtain the link indicating the first information. In response to the user operation acting on the accept control 7073, the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information, and lay out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information.
第二电子设备20按照该第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上重新布局后,第二电子设备20与第一电子设备10上同一应用的图标在桌面上的位置相同,可参考图6D中的用户界面200的描述,这里不再赘述。After the second electronic device 20 rearranges the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and application icon positions indicated by the first information, the icons of the same application on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10 are displayed on the desktop The positions are the same, and reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D , which will not be repeated here.
(b)登陆同一账号的第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20显示提示界面,通过提示界面上的用户操作触发桌面上应用图标同步(b) The first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 logging into the same account display a prompt interface, and trigger the synchronization of application icons on the desktop through user operations on the prompt interface
在本申请的一些实施例中,当第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20均登陆同一系统账号(例如华为账号)时,该账号对应的服务器可通知第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20,可进行桌面上应用图标同步。In some embodiments of the present application, when the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 both log in to the same system account (for example, a Huawei account), the server corresponding to the account may notify the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20. The application icons on the desktop can be synchronized.
第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20登陆账号过程中,第一电子设备10可通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术向服务器请求登陆该华为账号,服务器可验证第一电子设备10的登陆请求,例如服务器可存储用户设定账号对应的密码并通过密码验证,验证通过则第一电子设备10登陆该华为账号。本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10登陆该华为账号后,第一电子设备10的设备信息与该华为账号的关联关系即可存储在服务器上。类似地,云服务器可存储第二电子设备10的设备信息与该华为账号的关联关系。During the login process of the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20, the first electronic device 10 may request the server to log in the Huawei account through the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology, and the server may verify the login request of the first electronic device 10. For example, the server may store the password corresponding to the account set by the user and pass the password verification. If the verification is passed, the first electronic device 10 logs in to the Huawei account. In the embodiment of the present application, after the first electronic device 10 logs in to the Huawei account, the association relationship between the device information of the first electronic device 10 and the Huawei account can be stored on the server. Similarly, the cloud server may store the association relationship between the device information of the second electronic device 10 and the Huawei account.
当该华为账号关联有多个设备的设备信息时,服务器可通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术通知第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20,可进行桌面上应用图标同步。When the Huawei account is associated with device information of multiple devices, the server can notify the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 through cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology, and can synchronize application icons on the desktop.
具体的,以第一电子设备10为例介绍,请参阅图11A~图11C,图11A~图11C是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图11A所示,第一电子设备10接收到通知后,可显示用户界面800。用户界面800可包含提示801、选项控件802、选项控件803和取消控件804。其中:Specifically, taking the first electronic device 10 as an example, please refer to FIGS. 11A to 11C . FIGS. 11A to 11C are schematic diagrams of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11A , after receiving the notification, the first electronic device 10 may display a user interface 800 . User interface 800 may include prompt 801 , option control 802 , option control 803 , and cancel control 804 . in:
提示801,可提示“检测到您同时登陆两台设备,可跨设备同步应用图标位置”。Prompt 801, which can prompt "It is detected that you are logged in to two devices at the same time, and the location of the application icon can be synchronized across devices".
选项控件802,可用于将第一电子设备10的桌面布局和应用图标在桌面的位置发送出去,以使得第二电子设备20重新布局桌面图标。The option control 802 can be used to send the desktop layout of the first electronic device 10 and the position of the application icons on the desktop, so that the second electronic device 20 can rearrange the desktop icons.
选项控件803,可用于第一电子设备10接收同一华为账号下另一电子设备(例如第二电子设备20)的桌面布局和应用图标在桌面的位置,并重新进行桌面图标布局。The option control 803 can be used for the first electronic device 10 to receive the desktop layout and the position of the application icon on the desktop of another electronic device (eg, the second electronic device 20 ) under the same Huawei account, and re-layout the desktop icons.
取消控件804,用于取消第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20之间的桌面图标布局同步。响应于作用在取消控件804的用户操作,第一电子设备10可关闭用户界面800。The cancel control 804 is used to cancel the synchronization of the desktop icon layout between the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 . In response to a user operation acting on the cancel control 804 , the first electronic device 10 may close the user interface 800 .
本申请实施例中,响应于作用在选项控件803的用户操作,第一电子设备10可通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术向服务器发送请求。响应于该请求,服务器可通知第二电子设备20将携带桌面布局信息和应用图标在桌面的位置信息的信息发送给第一电子设备10。第二电子设备20可通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi、NFC、蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术中的一种或多种技术向 第一电子设备发送携带桌面布局信息和应用图标在桌面的位置信息的信息。In this embodiment of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the option control 803, the first electronic device 10 may send a request to the server through a cellular mobile communication technology or a WAN technology. In response to the request, the server may notify the second electronic device 20 to send the information carrying the desktop layout information and the position information of the application icon on the desktop to the first electronic device 10 . The second electronic device 20 may send the information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon on the desktop to the first electronic device through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, NFC, cellular mobile communication technology or WAN technology .
另外,第一电子设备10不限于通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术经由服务器向第二电子设备20请求桌面布局和应用图标位置,第一电子设备10还可以通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi或者NFC中的一种或多种向第二传输数据。具体的,以蓝牙和Wi-Fi为例,响应于作用在选项控件803的用户操作,第一电子设备10可开启蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块,并发送蓝牙广播。第二电子设备20也可开启蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块。当第二电子设备20扫描到第一电子设备10的蓝牙广播时,第二电子设备20可显示第一电子设备10的设备标识。响应于作用在该设备标识的用户操作,第二电子设备20可通过WLAN直连向第一电子设备10发送携带桌面布局信息和应用图标在桌面的位置信息的信息。In addition, the first electronic device 10 is not limited to requesting the desktop layout and the location of the application icon from the second electronic device 20 via the server through the cellular mobile communication technology or the WAN technology. The first electronic device 10 can also use Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or NFC in the One or more transmit data to the second. Specifically, taking Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as an example, in response to a user operation acting on the option control 803, the first electronic device 10 can turn on the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module, and send a Bluetooth broadcast. The second electronic device 20 can also turn on the Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module. When the second electronic device 20 scans the Bluetooth broadcast of the first electronic device 10 , the second electronic device 20 may display the device identification of the first electronic device 10 . In response to the user operation acting on the device identification, the second electronic device 20 may send information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icon on the desktop to the first electronic device 10 through the WLAN direct connection.
本申请实施例中,响应于作用在选项控件802的用户操作,第一电子设备10可经由服务器向第二电子设备20发送携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息。In this embodiment of the present application, in response to a user operation acting on the option control 802, the first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 via the server.
如图11B所示,第二电子设备20接收到第一信息后可显示提示框805,提示框805可包含提示8051、拒绝控件8052和接受控件8053。其中:As shown in FIG. 11B , after receiving the first information, the second electronic device 20 may display a prompt box 805 , and the prompt box 805 may include a prompt 8051 , a reject control 8052 and an accept control 8053 . in:
提示8051可提示“接收到桌面同步请求。接受后,将会把本设备桌面图标布局重新进行布局”。Prompt 8051 may prompt "Desktop synchronization request received. After acceptance, the layout of the desktop icons of this device will be re-layout".
拒绝控件8052,可用于第二电子设备20拒绝按照接收的第一信息,重新进行应用图标在桌面上的布局。The reject control 8052 can be used for the second electronic device 20 to reject the re-layout of the application icon on the desktop according to the received first information.
接受控件8053,用于第二电子设备20按照接收的第一信息,重新进行应用图标在桌面上的布局。The accepting control 8053 is used for the second electronic device 20 to redo the layout of the application icons on the desktop according to the received first information.
响应于作用在接受控件8053的用户操作,第二电子设备20按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。按照第一信息对所安装的应用图标在桌面上之后,如图11C所示,第二电子设备20显示用户已重新布局的桌面。第二电子设备20重新布局的桌面可参考图6D中的用户界面200的描述,这里不再赘述。In response to the user operation acting on the accept control 8053, the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information. After the installed application icons are placed on the desktop according to the first information, as shown in FIG. 11C , the second electronic device 20 displays the desktop that has been rearranged by the user. For the desktop rearranged by the second electronic device 20, reference may be made to the description of the user interface 200 in FIG. 6D, which will not be repeated here.
在另一些实施例中,当多个设备同时登陆同一账号(例如华为账号),在图11A所示出用户界面中,响应于作用在选项控件802的用户操作,第一电子设备10可显示图5C所示用户界面400。第一电子设备10还可通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi中的一个或多个将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。In other embodiments, when multiple devices log in to the same account (for example, a Huawei account) at the same time, in the user interface shown in FIG. 11A , in response to a user operation acting on the option control 802, the first electronic device 10 may display a User interface 400 shown in 5C. The first electronic device 10 may also send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through one or more of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,当多个设备同时登陆同一账号(例如华为账号),在图11A所示出用户界面中,响应于作用在选项控件802的用户操作,第一电子设备10还可显示图7中的(B)所示用户界面600。第一电子设备10还可通过NFC将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。In other embodiments of the present application, when multiple devices log in to the same account (for example, a Huawei account) at the same time, in the user interface shown in FIG. 11A, in response to the user operation acting on the option control 802, the first electronic device 10 The user interface 600 shown in (B) of FIG. 7 may also be displayed. The first electronic device 10 may also send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through NFC.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,当多个设备同时登陆同一账号(例如华为账号),在图11A所示出用户界面中,响应于作用在选项控件802的用户操作,第一电子设备10还可显示图8中的(B)所示用户界面700。第一电子设备10还可通过蜂窝移动通信技术或WAN技术将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。In other embodiments of the present application, when multiple devices log in to the same account (for example, a Huawei account) at the same time, in the user interface shown in FIG. 11A, in response to the user operation acting on the option control 802, the first electronic device 10 The user interface 700 shown in (B) in FIG. 8 may also be displayed. The first electronic device 10 may also send the first information carrying desktop layout information and application icon location information to the second electronic device 20 through a cellular mobile communication technology or a WAN technology.
在本申请实施例中,当第二电子设备20成功登陆该华为账号时,第二电子设备20可显示用户界面,该用户界面类比图11A所示第一电子设备10上的用户界面800。第二电子设备20也可接收作用在选项2的用户操作。响应于作用在选项2的用户操作,第二电子设备20可通过移动通信技术从第一电子设备接收第一信息。该第一信息携带第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息。之后,第二电子设备20可显示图11B所示出的提示框805。响应于作用在接受控件8053的用户操作,第二电子设备20按 照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。In this embodiment of the present application, when the second electronic device 20 successfully logs in to the Huawei account, the second electronic device 20 can display a user interface, which is analogous to the user interface 800 on the first electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 11A . The second electronic device 20 may also receive a user operation acting on option 2 . In response to the user operation acting on option 2, the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology. The first information carries desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device. After that, the second electronic device 20 may display the prompt box 805 shown in FIG. 11B . In response to the user operation acting on the accept control 8053, the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information.
可以理解的,本申请实施例以第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20均为手机、智能手表、平板电脑、个人电脑等设备为例进行介绍。但是本申请实施例不限于第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20为相同类型的设备。下面以第一电子设备10为手机,第二电子设备20为平板电脑为例举例说明。It can be understood that the embodiments of the present application are described by taking as an example that the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are both mobile phones, smart watches, tablet computers, personal computers and other devices. However, the embodiment of the present application is not limited to the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 being the same type of device. In the following, the first electronic device 10 is a mobile phone and the second electronic device 20 is a tablet computer as an example for illustration.
其中,第一电子设备10的桌面参考图4所描述实施例。请参阅图12,图12是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图12中的(A)所示,第二电子设备20可显示桌面806。桌面806可包含华为穿戴的应用图标8061、心脏健康研究的应用图标8062、设置的应用图标8063、图库的应用图标8064、邮箱的应用图标8065、浏览器的应用图标8066、应用商店的应用图标8067、音乐的应用图标8068、AI音箱的应用图标8069、备忘录的应用图标80610、QQ的应用图标80611和微信的应用图标80612。The desktop of the first electronic device 10 refers to the embodiment described in FIG. 4 . Please refer to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) of FIG. 12 , the second electronic device 20 may display a desktop 806 . The desktop 806 may include application icons 8061 for Huawei wear, application icons 8062 for heart health research, application icons 8063 for settings, application icons 8064 for gallery, application icons 8065 for mailboxes, application icons 8066 for browsers, and application icons 8067 for application stores , music application icon 8068, AI speaker application icon 8069, memo application icon 80610, QQ application icon 80611 and WeChat application icon 80612.
其中:华为穿戴的应用图标8061位于桌面的第1行第1列。心脏健康研究的应用图标8062位于桌面806的第1行第2列。设置的应用图标8063位于桌面806的第1行第3列。图库的应用图标8064位于桌面806的第1行第4列。邮箱的应用图标8065位于桌面806的第1行第5列。浏览器的应用图标8066位于桌面806的第2行第1列。应用商店的应用图标8067位于桌面806的第2行第2列。音乐的应用图标8068位于桌面806的第2行第3列。AI音箱的应用图标8069位于桌面806的第2行第4列。备忘录的应用图标80610位于桌面806的第2行第5列。QQ的应用图标80611位于桌面806的第3行第1列。微信的应用图标80612位于桌面806的第3行第2列。Among them: The application icon 8061 of Huawei Wear is located in the 1st row and 1st column of the desktop. The Heart Health Research application icon 8062 is located on the desktop 806 in row 1 and column 2. The set application icon 8063 is located in the first row and the third column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 8064 of the gallery is located in the first row and the fourth column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 8065 of the mailbox is located in the first row and the fifth column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 8066 of the browser is located in the second row and the first column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 8067 of the application store is located in the second row and the second column of the desktop 806 . The music application icon 8068 is located in the second row and the third column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 8069 of the AI speaker is located in the second row and the fourth column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 80610 of the memo is located in the second row and the fifth column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 80611 of QQ is located in the 3rd row and 1st column of the desktop 806 . The WeChat application icon 80612 is located in the third row and the second column of the desktop 806 .
第二电子设备20的桌面806还可以包含导航栏80613。导航栏80613可包含拨号的应用图标、信息的应用图标、联系人的应用图标和相机的应用图标。拨号的应用图标、信息的应用图标、联系人的应用图标和相机的应用图标分别位于导航栏80613的第1列、第2列、第3列和第4列。The desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 may also include a navigation bar 80613 . The navigation bar 80613 may contain an application icon for dialing, an application icon for information, an application icon for contacts, and an application icon for camera. The dial application icons, the message application icons, the contact application icons, and the camera application icons are located in the first, second, third, and fourth columns of the navigation bar 80613, respectively.
第一电子设备10可将携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息发送给第二电子设备20。具体的,第一电子设备10可通过蓝牙、Wi-Fi、NFC中的一种或多种技术向第二电子设备20发送第一信息,也可通过移动通信技术或WAN技术发送第一信息,具体参考图5A~图5D、图6A~图6D、图7~图10、图11A~图11C所描述示例。The first electronic device 10 may send the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the location information of the application icons to the second electronic device 20 . Specifically, the first electronic device 10 can send the first information to the second electronic device 20 through one or more technologies of Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and NFC, or can send the first information through a mobile communication technology or a WAN technology, Specific reference is made to the examples described in FIGS. 5A to 5D , 6A to 6D , 7 to 10 , and 11A to 11C .
第二电子设备20(例如平板电脑)接收到第一信息之后,可按照第一信息重新进行桌面图标布局。如图12中的(B)所示,重新布局之后,在第二电子设备20的桌面806上,AI音箱的应用图标8069位于第1行第2列,与第一电子设备10上AI音箱的应用图标1022的位置相同。即第一电子设备10上AI音箱的图标1022也位于第1行第2列。重新布局之后,在第二电子设备20的桌面806上,备忘录的应用图标80610位于第1行第3列,与第一电子设备10上备忘录的应用图标1023的位置相同。重新布局之后,类似地,在第二电子设备20的桌面806上,应用商店的应用图标8067、音乐的应用图标8068、浏览器的应用图标8066、心脏健康研究的应用图标806、邮箱的应用图标8065、图库的应用图标80642、设置的应用图标8063、华为穿戴的应用图标8061与第一电子设备10上相同应用图标的位置相同。After the second electronic device 20 (eg, a tablet computer) receives the first information, it can re-layout the desktop icons according to the first information. As shown in (B) of FIG. 12 , after the rearrangement, on the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 , the application icon 8069 of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 . The location of the application icon 1022 is the same. That is, the icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 is also located in the first row and the second column. After the rearrangement, on the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 , the application icon 80610 of the memo is located in the first row and the third column, which is the same as the application icon 1023 of the memo on the first electronic device 10 . After the rearrangement, similarly, on the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20, the application icon 8067 of the application store, the application icon 8068 of the music, the application icon 8066 of the browser, the application icon 806 of the heart health research, the application icon of the mailbox 8065 , the application icon 80642 of the gallery, the set application icon 8063 , and the application icon 8061 of Huawei Wear are in the same location as the same application icon on the first electronic device 10 .
其中,如图12中的(B)所示,桌面806的第1行第1列不放置任何图标,第1行第4列也不放置任何图标。Wherein, as shown in (B) of FIG. 12 , no icon is placed in the first row and first column of the desktop 806 , nor is any icon placed in the first row and fourth column.
类似的,重新布局之后,如图12中的(B)和图4所示,第二电子设备20的桌面的导航栏203中应用图标与第一电子设备上相同应用图标的位置相同。相机的应用图标、拨号的 应用图标、信息的应用图标、联系人的应用图标,分别位于第二电子设备桌面806的导航栏80613的第1列、第2列、第3列和第4列。这与第一电子设备10的桌面导航栏103中相同应用图标的位置相同。Similarly, after the rearrangement, as shown in FIG. 12(B) and FIG. 4 , the location of the application icon in the navigation bar 203 of the desktop of the second electronic device 20 is the same as that of the same application icon on the first electronic device. The application icon of the camera, the application icon of the dial, the application icon of the information, and the application icon of the contact are located in the first column, the second column, the third column and the fourth column of the navigation bar 80613 of the second electronic device desktop 806, respectively. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the desktop navigation bar 103 of the first electronic device 10 .
本申请实施例中,第一电子设备10可不包含QQ的应用图标和微信的应用图标。即第一信息可不包含QQ的应用图标和微信的应用图标的位置信息。则第二电子设备20上QQ的应用图标80611和微信的应用图标80612可按照在桌面806上移动距离最小原则,分别位于第二电子设备20桌面806上第4行第1列、第4行第2列。关于移动距离最小原则请参考图15~17的描述。In this embodiment of the present application, the first electronic device 10 may not include an application icon of QQ and an application icon of WeChat. That is, the first information may not include the location information of the application icon of QQ and the application icon of WeChat. Then the application icon 80611 of QQ and the application icon 80612 of WeChat on the second electronic device 20 can be located on the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 in the fourth row, the first column, and the fourth row, respectively, according to the principle of the minimum moving distance on the desktop 806. 2 columns. For the principle of the minimum moving distance, please refer to the descriptions of FIGS. 15 to 17 .
本申请实施例中,图12所示仅为一种示例,第二电子设备20不限于按照图12所描述示例中进行应用图标布局。例如,重新布局后,第二电子设备20的桌面806上,QQ的应用图标80611可位于桌面806的第1行第1列。微信的应用图标80612可位于桌面806的第1行第4列。In this embodiment of the present application, FIG. 12 is only an example, and the second electronic device 20 is not limited to the application icon layout according to the example described in FIG. 12 . For example, after the rearrangement, on the desktop 806 of the second electronic device 20 , the application icon 80611 of QQ may be located in the first row and the first column of the desktop 806 . The application icon 80612 of WeChat may be located in the first row and the fourth column of the desktop 806 .
下面介绍本申请实施例中,第二电子设备20重新布局桌面图标的一些实施例。Some embodiments of rearranging desktop icons on the second electronic device 20 in the embodiments of the present application are described below.
(1)桌面存在文件夹的情况(1) There are folders on the desktop
在一种可能的实施例中,第一电子设备10的桌面上多个应用图标可位于一个文件夹中。则第一电子设备10可将这多个应用图标在同一文件夹的信息以及该文件夹在桌面所在的位置信息携带在第一信息中发送给第二电子设备20。当第二电子设备20上也安装有这多个应用时,第二电子设备20可按照第一信息新建文件夹并将这多个应用图标放置在文件夹中并将该文件夹放置在桌面上与第一电子设备10桌面上相同的位置。In a possible embodiment, a plurality of application icons on the desktop of the first electronic device 10 may be located in one folder. Then, the first electronic device 10 can send the information that the multiple application icons are in the same folder and the location information of the folder on the desktop in the first information and send to the second electronic device 20 . When the multiple applications are also installed on the second electronic device 20, the second electronic device 20 may create a new folder according to the first information, place the multiple application icons in the folder, and place the folder on the desktop The same position as on the desktop of the first electronic device 10 .
具体的,请参阅图13,图13是本申请实施例提供的一种用户界面的示意图。如图13所示,第一电子设备10可显示桌面105。桌面105可包含应用1的图标、应用2的图标、应用3的图标、应用4的图标、应用5的图标、应用6的图标、应用7的图标、应用8的图标。这些图标对应的应用均不同。桌面105还可包含文件夹1,文件夹1可包含应用9的图标、应用10的图标。示例性的,如图13所示,文件夹1的名称为“视频”。Specifically, please refer to FIG. 13 , which is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 13 , the first electronic device 10 can display a desktop 105 . Desktop 105 may contain an icon for Application 1, an icon for Application 2, an icon for Application 3, an icon for Application 4, an icon for Application 5, an icon for Application 6, an icon for Application 7, an icon for Application 8. These icons correspond to different apps. Desktop 105 may also contain Folder 1, which may contain icons for application 9, icons for application 10. Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 13 , the name of the folder 1 is “videos”.
其中,应用1的图标、应用2的图标、应用3的图标、应用4的图标分别位于桌面105的第1行的第1~4列。应用5的图标、应用6的图标、应用7的图标、应用8的图标分别位于桌面105的第2行的第1~4列。文件夹1位于桌面105的第3行第1列。文件夹1中应用图标9位于文件夹1的第1行第1列,应用图标10位于文件夹1的第1行第2列。The icon of application 1 , the icon of application 2 , the icon of application 3 , and the icon of application 4 are respectively located in the first to fourth columns of the first row of the desktop 105 . The icon of application 5 , the icon of application 6 , the icon of application 7 , and the icon of application 8 are respectively located in the first to fourth columns of the second row of the desktop 105 . Folder 1 is located at row 3, column 1 of desktop 105. In the folder 1, the application icon 9 is located in the first row and the first column of the folder 1, and the application icon 10 is located in the first row and the second column of the folder 1.
桌面105还可包含导航栏1051。导航栏1051可包含应用11的图标、应用12的图标、应用13的图标、应用14的图标。应用11的图标、应用12的图标、应用13的图标、应用14的图标分别位于导航栏1051的第1~4列。Desktop 105 may also include a navigation bar 1051 . The navigation bar 1051 may contain an icon for application 11 , an icon for application 12 , an icon for application 13 , an icon for application 14 . The icon of application 11 , the icon of application 12 , the icon of application 13 , and the icon of application 14 are located in the first to fourth columns of the navigation bar 1051 , respectively.
第二电子设备20可显示桌面204。请参阅图14,图14是本申请实施例提供的一种用户界面的示意图。如图14中的(A)所示,桌面204可包含应用1的应用图标、应用6的图标、文件夹3(包含应用7的图标和应用8的图标,名称为“购物”)、应用9的图标、应用10的图标、应用15的图标。桌面204还可包含导航栏2041。导航栏2041可包含应用12的图标、应用13的图标、应用11的图标、应用14的图标。The second electronic device 20 may display the desktop 204 . Please refer to FIG. 14. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a user interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (A) of FIG. 14 , the desktop 204 may include the application icon of application 1, the icon of application 6, the folder 3 (including the icon of application 7 and the icon of application 8, named “Shopping”), application 9 , the icon of application 10, the icon of application 15. Desktop 204 may also include a navigation bar 2041 . The navigation bar 2041 may contain an icon of application 12, an icon of application 13, an icon of application 11, an icon of application 14.
其中:应用6的图标、文件夹3分别位于桌面204的第1行的第1、第2列。应用9的图标、应用10的图标、应用15的图标、应用1的图标分别位于桌面204的第2行的第1~4列。应用12的图标、应用13的图标、应用11的图标、应用14的图标分别位于导航栏2041的第1~4列。Wherein: the icon of the application 6 and the folder 3 are respectively located in the first and second columns of the first row of the desktop 204 . The icon of application 9 , the icon of application 10 , the icon of application 15 , and the icon of application 1 are respectively located in the first to fourth columns of the second row of the desktop 204 . The icon of application 12, the icon of application 13, the icon of application 11, and the icon of application 14 are located in the first to fourth columns of the navigation bar 2041, respectively.
第二电子设备20可按照携带桌面布局信息及应用图标位置信息的第一信息重新进行桌 面应用图标布局。重新进行桌面应用图标布局之后,如图14中的(B)所示,桌面204上应用1的图标位于第二电子设备桌面204的第1行第1列。应用6的图标、应用7的图标和应用8的图标分别位于第二电子设备204的第2行第2~4列。这与第一电子设备10相同应用图标的位置相同。重新布局之后,删除了文件夹3。The second electronic device 20 can reconfigure the desktop application icon layout according to the first information carrying the desktop layout information and the application icon position information. After re-laying the desktop application icons, as shown in (B) of FIG. 14 , the icon of the application 1 on the desktop 204 is located in the first row and the first column of the desktop 204 of the second electronic device. The icon of the application 6, the icon of the application 7, and the icon of the application 8 are located in the second row, the second to the fourth column of the second electronic device 204, respectively. This is the same as the location of the same application icon of the first electronic device 10 . After the rearrangement, folder 3 was deleted.
第二电子设备20还可按照第一信息,创建文件夹2并将应用9的图标、应用10的图标放在文件夹2中。第二电子设备20中文件夹2的名称与第一电子设备10中文件夹1的名称相同,为“视频”。重新进行桌面应用图标布局之后,文件夹2在桌面204的位置与文件夹1在第一电子设备19的桌面105的位置相同。即文件夹2在桌面204的第3行第1列。文件夹2中,应用9的图标与第一电子设备10的文件夹1中应用9的图标位置相同,即应用9的图标在文件夹2的第1行第1列。类似的,文件夹2中应用10的图标与第一电子设备10的文件夹1中应用10的图标位置相同,即应用10的图标在文件夹2的第1行第2列。The second electronic device 20 may also create a folder 2 according to the first information, and place the icon of the application 9 and the icon of the application 10 in the folder 2 . The name of the folder 2 in the second electronic device 20 is the same as the name of the folder 1 in the first electronic device 10, which is "video". After re-laying the desktop application icons, the location of the folder 2 on the desktop 204 is the same as the location of the folder 1 on the desktop 105 of the first electronic device 19 . That is, the folder 2 is in the 3rd row and 1st column of the desktop 204 . In the folder 2 , the icon of the application 9 has the same location as the icon of the application 9 in the folder 1 of the first electronic device 10 , that is, the icon of the application 9 is in the first row and the first column of the folder 2 . Similarly, the icon of the application 10 in the folder 2 is in the same position as the icon of the application 10 in the folder 1 of the first electronic device 10 , that is, the icon of the application 10 is in the first row and the second column of the folder 2 .
重新进行桌面应用图标布局之后,第二电子设备20导航栏2041上应用11的图标、应用12的图标、应用13的图标和应用14的图标分别位于第二电子设备桌面204的导航栏2041的第1列、第2列、第3列和第4列。这与第一电子设备10的桌面105的导航栏1051中相同应用图标的位置相同。After re-laying the desktop application icons, the icon of application 11, the icon of application 12, the icon of application 13, and the icon of application 14 on the navigation bar 2041 of the second electronic device 20 are respectively located on the first page of the navigation bar 2041 of the desktop 204 of the second electronic device. Column 1, Column 2, Column 3, and Column 4. This is the same as the location of the same application icon in the navigation bar 1051 of the desktop 105 of the first electronic device 10 .
其中,由于第一电子设备10可未安装应用15,第一信息可未包含应用15的图标位置。即应用15为第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20的非共同应用。应用15的图标可按照移动距离最小原则,设置在第二电子设备20桌面204的第1行第3列。Wherein, since the first electronic device 10 may not have the application 15 installed, the first information may not include the icon location of the application 15 . That is, the application 15 is a non-common application of the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 . The icon of the application 15 may be set in the first row and the third column of the desktop 204 of the second electronic device 20 according to the principle of the smallest moving distance.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一电子设备和第二电子设备可包含同名的文件夹。该同名的文件夹内包含一个或多个相同的应用图标。重新进行布局后,第二电子设备上该同名文件夹保留并设置在第一电子设备相同的位置,该同名文件夹中相同的应用图标的位置与第一电子设备中对应的应用图标的位置相同。重新布局后,第二电子设备上该同名文件夹中与第一电子设备上不同的应用图标移出该同名文件夹,且该不同的应用图标按照最小移动距离原则移动。In some embodiments of the present application, the first electronic device and the second electronic device may contain folders with the same name. The same-named folder contains one or more identical application icons. After re-layout, the folder with the same name on the second electronic device is retained and set in the same position as the first electronic device, and the position of the same application icon in the folder with the same name is the same as the position of the corresponding application icon in the first electronic device. . After the rearrangement, the different application icons in the folder with the same name on the second electronic device and those on the first electronic device are moved out of the folder with the same name, and the different application icons are moved according to the principle of minimum moving distance.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一电子设备和第二电子设备包含不同名的文件夹,但不同名的文件夹中包含相同的应用图标。重新进行桌面布局后,第二电子设备上该不同名的文件夹移动到与第一电子设备上相同的位置。重新进行桌面布局后,第二电子设备上该不同名的文件夹中相同的应用图标在文件夹中的位置与第一电子设备上相同。重新进行桌面布局后,第二电子设备上该不同名的文件夹中与第一电子设备不同的应用图标移出文件夹,并按照最小移动距离原则移动。In some embodiments of the present application, the first electronic device and the second electronic device include folders with different names, but the folders with different names include the same application icon. After the desktop layout is reset, the folder with the different name on the second electronic device is moved to the same location as that on the first electronic device. After the desktop layout is reset, the position of the same application icon in the folder with the different name on the second electronic device is the same as that on the first electronic device. After the desktop layout is reset, the application icons in the folder with different names on the second electronic device that are different from those of the first electronic device are moved out of the folder and moved according to the principle of the minimum moving distance.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一电子设备和第二电子设备包含同名或是不同名的文件夹,文件夹内包含相同的应用图标。重新进行布局后,第二电子设备上该同名或不同名文件夹可移动到与第一电子设备上位置相同,并按照移动距离最小原则移动。In some embodiments of the present application, the first electronic device and the second electronic device include folders with the same name or different names, and the folders include the same application icon. After re-layout, the folder with the same name or different name on the second electronic device can be moved to the same position as that on the first electronic device, and moved according to the principle of minimum moving distance.
(2)对于第二电子设备20上与第一电子设备10上非共同应用的图标,移动应用图标数量最小原则,应用图标移动距离最小原则(2) For icons that are not commonly applied on the second electronic device 20 and the first electronic device 10, the principle of the minimum number of mobile application icons and the principle of the minimum moving distance of the application icons
本申请实施例中,对于第一电子设备10未安装的应用(例如图14所描述应用15),第一信息可未包含该应用的图标位置。即该应用为第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20的非共同应用。第二电子设备20可对于这些非共同应用,采用移动距离最小原则和移动应用图标的数量最小原则确定各应用图标的位置。可以理解的,本申请实施例中移动距离所涉及的计步规则仅用于解释本申请实施例,不应构成限定。In this embodiment of the present application, for an application that is not installed on the first electronic device 10 (for example, the application 15 described in FIG. 14 ), the first information may not include the icon location of the application. That is, the application is a non-common application of the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 . For these non-common applications, the second electronic device 20 may determine the position of each application icon by adopting the principle of minimum moving distance and the principle of minimum number of mobile application icons. It can be understood that the step counting rules involved in the moving distance in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain the embodiments of the present application, and should not be construed as limitations.
举例说明,请参阅图15,图15是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。第一电子 设备10的桌面参考图13所描述桌面105。如图15中的(A)所示,第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20均安装有应用1、应用3、应用4、应用7、应用8、应用9、应用10、应用12、应用13、应用14。即这些应用是共同应用。For example, please refer to FIG. 15 , which is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application. The desktop of the first electronic device 10 is the desktop 105 described with reference to FIG. 13 . As shown in (A) of FIG. 15 , both the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 are installed with application 1 , application 3 , application 4 , application 7 , application 8 , application 9 , application 10 , application 12 , and application 13. Application 14. That is, these applications are common applications.
第二电子设备20接收到第一信息之后,按照第一信息确定这些共同应用的图标在桌面上的位置。这些共同应用的图标在桌面的位置与第一电子设备10上对应应用的图标位置相同。例如,如图15中的(B)所示,在第一电子设备10桌面105上应用1的图标的位置为第1行第1列,则重新进行桌面图标布局后第二电子设备20桌面204上应用1的图标的位置也为第1行第1列。After receiving the first information, the second electronic device 20 determines the positions of the icons of these common applications on the desktop according to the first information. The positions of the icons of these common applications on the desktop are the same as the positions of the icons of the corresponding applications on the first electronic device 10 . For example, as shown in (B) of FIG. 15 , the position of the icon of application 1 on the desktop 105 of the first electronic device 10 is the first row and the first column, then after re-laying the desktop icons, the desktop 204 of the second electronic device 20 The location of the icon on app 1 is also row 1, column 1.
第二电子设备20上应用15和应用16为与第一电子设备10非共同应用。即第一电子设备10未安装该应用15和应用16。The application 15 and the application 16 on the second electronic device 20 are non-common applications with the first electronic device 10 . That is, the application 15 and the application 16 are not installed on the first electronic device 10 .
对于非共同应用(应用15和应用16),在桌面204移动的应用图标数量尽量少,应用图标移动的总的距离尽量小。具体的,如图15中的(B)所示,对于非共同应用16的图标,在未重新进行桌面图标布局之前,位于导航栏2041的第1列。在重新布局之后,应用16的图标仍然位于导航栏2041的第1列。对于非共同应用15,在未重新进行桌面图标布局之前,位于桌面204的第2行第3列。在重新布局之后,应用15的图标位于桌面204的第2行第2列,移动1步。在桌面204移动的应用图标数量尽量少(移动1个应用图标即应用16的图标),应用图标移动的总的距离尽量小(移动1步)。For non-common applications (application 15 and application 16), the number of application icons moved on the desktop 204 is as small as possible, and the total distance of movement of the application icons is as small as possible. Specifically, as shown in (B) of FIG. 15 , the icons of the non-common application 16 are located in the first column of the navigation bar 2041 before the desktop icon layout is re-laid. After the rearrangement, the icon for application 16 is still in column 1 of the navigation bar 2041. For the non-common application 15, it is located in the second row and the third column of the desktop 204 before the desktop icon layout is redone. After the rearrangement, the icon of application 15 is located in row 2 and column 2 of desktop 204, moved 1 step. The number of application icons moved on the desktop 204 is as small as possible (moving one application icon is the icon of the application 16 ), and the total distance moved by the application icons is as small as possible (moving one step).
在例如,请参阅图16,图16是本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。如图16所示,第二电子设备20上应用15和应用17为非共同应用。对于非共同应用15的图标,在未重新进行桌面图标布局之前,位于桌面204的第2行第3列。在重新布局之后,应用15的图标位于桌面204的第2行第3列,移动1步。对于非共同应用17的图标,在未重新进行桌面图标布局之前,位于桌面204的第1行第3列。在重新布局之后,应用17的图标位于桌面204的第1行第3列,移动1步。应用图标移动的总的距离尽量小(移动2步)。For example, please refer to FIG. 16 , which is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by the embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 16 , the application 15 and the application 17 on the second electronic device 20 are non-common applications. The icons of the non-common application 15 are located in the second row and the third column of the desktop 204 before the desktop icon layout is redone. After the rearrangement, the icon of application 15 is located in row 2 and column 3 of desktop 204, moved 1 step. The icons of the non-common application 17 are located in the first row and the third column of the desktop 204 before the desktop icon layout is redone. After the rearrangement, the icon of application 17 is located in row 1 and column 3 of desktop 204, moved 1 step. The total distance that the app icon moves is as small as possible (2 steps).
另外,第二电子设备20上未安装应用10,第二电子设备20可将应用9的图标设置在桌面204的第3行第1列,与第一电子设备10上文件夹1的位置相同。文件夹1包含应用9的图标。In addition, if the application 10 is not installed on the second electronic device 20 , the second electronic device 20 can set the icon of the application 9 on the third row and the first column of the desktop 204 , which is the same as the folder 1 on the first electronic device 10 . Folder 1 contains icons for app 9.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第一电子设备10的桌面和第二电子设备20的桌面可均包含文件夹,例如第一电子设备10的桌面包含文件夹3,第二电子设备20的桌面包含文件夹4。当文件夹3和文件夹4包含相同的APP时,第二电子设备20可按照第一信息将文件夹4调整到文件夹3在桌面的位置,并且重新布局后文件夹4中的应用图标在文件夹3中也均存在。第二电子设备20还可将文件夹4的名称调整为和文件夹3的名称相同。例如,文件夹3中包含应用1的图标、应用2的图标。文件夹4中包含应用2的图标、应用3的图标。则第二电子设备20重新进行桌面图标布局后,文件夹4中也包含应用1的图标、应用2的图标,且文件夹4在第二电子设备20桌面的位置与文件夹3在第一电子设备10上的位置相同。In some embodiments of the present application, the desktop of the first electronic device 10 and the desktop of the second electronic device 20 may both contain folders, for example, the desktop of the first electronic device 10 contains folder 3, and the desktop of the second electronic device 20 Contains folder 4. When the folder 3 and the folder 4 contain the same APP, the second electronic device 20 can adjust the folder 4 to the position of the folder 3 on the desktop according to the first information, and after the rearrangement, the application icons in the folder 4 are at Folder 3 also exists. The second electronic device 20 can also adjust the name of the folder 4 to be the same as the name of the folder 3 . For example, folder 3 contains the icon of application 1 and the icon of application 2. Folder 4 contains the icon of application 2 and the icon of application 3. Then, after the second electronic device 20 redoes the desktop icon layout, the folder 4 also contains the icon of the application 1 and the icon of the application 2, and the position of the folder 4 on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 and the position of the folder 3 on the first electronic device are also included. The position on device 10 is the same.
在本申请的一些实施例中,在根据第一信息重新进行桌面图标布局之后,第二电子设备20上文件夹5中应用1的图标需从文件夹5中移出。移出后,文件夹5可仍包含多个应用图标。重新进行桌面图标布局之后,该文件夹5可依然存在,且移动距离最小。In some embodiments of the present application, after re-laying the desktop icons according to the first information, the icon of the application 1 in the folder 5 on the second electronic device 20 needs to be removed from the folder 5 . After removal, folder 5 may still contain multiple application icons. After re-laying the desktop icons, the folder 5 can still exist, and the moving distance is minimal.
可以理解的,本申请实施例对上述文件夹方案的举例仅用于解释本申请实施例不应构成限定。It can be understood that the examples of the above-mentioned folder solutions in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain the embodiments of the present application and should not be construed as limitations.
下面介绍本申请实施例中,第二电子设备20上图标移动距离的计算。The following describes the calculation of the moving distance of the icon on the second electronic device 20 in the embodiment of the present application.
其中,第二电子设备20上图标移动距离是指,第二电子设备20在重新进行桌面图标布局之前和之后,同一应用图标在桌面上移动的距离。该距离以桌面上非导航栏区域相邻的图标步数为单位。下面举例说明。The moving distance of the icon on the second electronic device 20 refers to the distance that the same application icon moves on the desktop before and after the second electronic device 20 redoes the desktop icon layout. The distance is in units of icon steps adjacent to the non-navigation bar area on the desktop. An example is given below.
①对于桌面上非导航栏的应用图标①For application icons that are not in the navigation bar on the desktop
重新进行桌面图标布局之前到重新进行桌面图标布局之后,同一应用图标在桌面棋盘格移动的步数即为该应用图标的移动距离。这里每步应用图标仅能向上下左右相邻的应用图标位置移动。例如,图16中(A)和(B)所示出的用户界面中,应用1的应用图标由第2行第4列,移动到第1行第1列,共移动4步。应用15的图标由第2行第3列,移动到第2行第2列,共移动1步。From before re-laying the desktop icons to after re-laying the desktop icons, the number of steps that the same application icon moves on the desktop checkerboard is the moving distance of the application icon. Here, each step of the application icon can only move up, down, left, and right adjacent application icon positions. For example, in the user interface shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 16 , the application icon of application 1 moves from the second row and the fourth column to the first row and the first column, for a total of 4 steps. The icon of application 15 moves from the 2nd row to the 3rd column to the 2nd row and 2nd column, a total of 1 step.
桌面上非导航栏的应用图标在移动到导航栏时,总的移动步数为按照桌面棋盘格在一个页面上移动的步数+10。可以理解的,本申请实施例以增加10步为例,不限于这个数值,还可以是增加其他的数值。When the application icon on the desktop that is not in the navigation bar is moved to the navigation bar, the total number of moving steps is the number of steps moved on a page according to the desktop checkerboard + 10. It can be understood that the embodiment of the present application takes adding 10 steps as an example, and is not limited to this value, and other values may also be added.
桌面上非导航栏的应用图标在由桌面一个页面移动到另一个页面时,总的移动步数为按照桌面棋盘格在一个页面上移动的步数+10。举例说明,请参阅图17,图17为本申请实施例提供的一些用户界面示意图。图17中的(A)为按照第一信息重新布局之前的桌面204。如图17中的(A)所示,桌面204还可包含页面指示符2042,该页面指示符2042指示,当前浏览的页面是最右侧页面,用户可向左滑动以使得第二电子设备20切换显示到另两个左边的页面。当第二电子设备20按照第一信息重新进行桌面图标布局之后,如图17中的(B)所示,页面指示符2042指示,应用15的图标设置在桌面中间页面。按照桌面棋盘格在一个页面上由图17中的(B)所示的位置1移动到位置2,即移动1步。位置1为重新布局前应用15在一个页面上所在位置,即桌面的第2行第3列。则总的移动的步数为11(即1步+10步)步。When the application icon on the desktop that is not in the navigation bar moves from one page of the desktop to another, the total number of moving steps is the number of steps moved on one page according to the desktop checkerboard + 10. For example, please refer to FIG. 17 . FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of some user interfaces provided by this embodiment of the present application. (A) in FIG. 17 is the desktop 204 before rearrangement according to the first information. As shown in (A) of FIG. 17 , the desktop 204 may further include a page indicator 2042 indicating that the currently browsed page is the rightmost page, and the user can swipe left to make the second electronic device 20 Switch the display to the other two pages on the left. After the second electronic device 20 redoes the desktop icon layout according to the first information, as shown in (B) of FIG. 17 , the page indicator 2042 indicates that the icon of the application 15 is set on the middle page of the desktop. Move from position 1 to position 2 shown in (B) in FIG. 17 on one page according to the desktop checkerboard, that is, move 1 step. Position 1 is the position of the application 15 on a page before re-layout, that is, the second row and the third column of the desktop. Then the total number of moving steps is 11 (ie 1 step + 10 steps) steps.
图17中(A)中导航栏2041和桌面204可参考图16中(A)的描述,这里不再赘述。The navigation bar 2041 and the desktop 204 in (A) in FIG. 17 may refer to the description in (A) in FIG. 16 , and will not be repeated here.
②对于导航栏的应用图标②App icon for navigation bar
导航栏的应用图标,在移动到桌面上非导航栏,总的移动步数为按照桌面棋盘格在一个页面上移动的步数+10。When the application icon of the navigation bar is moved to the desktop and not the navigation bar, the total number of moving steps is the number of steps moved on a page according to the desktop checkerboard + 10.
导航栏的应用图标在导航栏内移动按照桌面棋盘格移动的步数。The application icon of the navigation bar moves within the navigation bar by the number of steps moved by the desktop checkerboard.
③文件夹中应用图标③App icon in the folder
应用图标从文件夹内移出,该应用图标以文件夹的位置为起点计算棋盘格移动步数。The application icon is moved out of the folder, and the application icon counts the number of checkerboard moves starting from the location of the folder.
在本申请的一些实施例中,重新进行桌面图标布局之前和之后,整个文件夹移动时,文件夹的总的移动步数为按照桌面棋盘格在一个页面上移动的步数乘以10。In some embodiments of the present application, before and after re-laying the desktop icons, when the entire folder is moved, the total number of moving steps of the folder is the number of steps moved on a page according to the desktop checkerboard multiplied by 10.
在本申请实施例中,当第二电子设备20上非共同应用的图标中需移动的数量为n(n为大于等于1的整数)时,穷举移动图标的方法共有n的阶乘种方法。本申请实施例中,第二电子设备20可通过“移动应用图标数量最小原则,应用图标移动距离最小原则”确定移动图标的方案。这样,可减小第二电子设备20的计算量,从而减少对第二电子设备20处理器和内存的占用,提高设备运行速度。In the embodiment of the present application, when the number of icons to be moved in the non-commonly applied icons on the second electronic device 20 is n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1), there are a total of n factorial methods for exhaustively moving icons. In this embodiment of the present application, the second electronic device 20 may determine the solution for moving the icons according to the "principle of the minimum number of mobile application icons and the principle of the minimum moving distance of the application icons". In this way, the calculation amount of the second electronic device 20 can be reduced, thereby reducing the occupation of the processor and the memory of the second electronic device 20 and improving the running speed of the device.
本申请实施例中,不限于上述确定移动图标方案,第二电子设备20还可以采用其他算法确定移动图标的方案。例如,第二电子设备20还可以采用匈牙利算法,计算复杂度为n 3In the embodiment of the present application, not limited to the above-mentioned solution for determining the moving icon, the second electronic device 20 may also use other algorithms to determine the solution for determining the moving icon. For example, the second electronic device 20 may also use the Hungarian algorithm, and the computational complexity is n 3 .
下面介绍本申请实施例提供的一种应用图标布局方法。请参阅图18,图18是本申请实 施例提供的一种应用图标布局方法的流程示意图。如图18所示,该应用图标布局方法包括步骤S101~S105。The following describes an application icon layout method provided by an embodiment of the present application. Please refer to FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of an application icon layout method provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18 , the application icon layout method includes steps S101 to S105.
在本申请实施例中,第一电子设备显示第一桌面,第二电子设备显示第二桌面。第一桌面例如是图4所示出的用户界面和图13所示出的用户界面。第二桌面例如是图6A所示出的用户界面、图12中的(A)所示出的用户界面、图14中的(A)所示出的用户界面、图15中的(A)所示出的用户界面、图16中的(A)所示出的用户界面和图17中的(A)所示出的用户界面。In this embodiment of the present application, the first electronic device displays the first desktop, and the second electronic device displays the second desktop. The first desktop is, for example, the user interface shown in FIG. 4 and the user interface shown in FIG. 13 . The second desktop is, for example, the user interface shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 12 , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 14 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 15 . The user interface shown, the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 16 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 17 .
S101、第二电子设备20接收到第一用户操作。该第一用户操作用于其他电子设备(例如第一电子设备10)发现该第二电子设备20。S101. The second electronic device 20 receives a first user operation. The first user operation is used for other electronic devices (eg, the first electronic device 10 ) to discover the second electronic device 20 .
本申请实施例中,该第一用户操作,可以是图6B所示用户界面作用在极速分享控件501的用户操作。该第一用户操作为开启所述第二电子设备的蓝牙开关的用户操作或者开启第二电子设备的Wi-Fi开关的用户操作。In this embodiment of the present application, the first user operation may be a user operation performed by the user interface shown in FIG. 6B acting on the speed sharing control 501 . The first user operation is a user operation of turning on the Bluetooth switch of the second electronic device or a user operation of turning on the Wi-Fi switch of the second electronic device.
S102、响应于第一用户操作,第二电子设备20发送第一广播。S102. In response to the first user operation, the second electronic device 20 sends the first broadcast.
该第一广播可以是蓝牙广播,也可以是Wi-Fi广播。第一广播还可以是其他类型的广播,本申请实施例对此不作限制。The first broadcast may be a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast. The first broadcast may also be another type of broadcast, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
S103、第一电子设备10接收到第二用户操作。该第二用户操作用于发现第二电子设备20。S103. The first electronic device 10 receives a second user operation. The second user operation is used to discover the second electronic device 20 .
本申请实施例中,该第二用户操作可以包含图5C~图5D所示用户界面作用在极速分享控件4021的用户操作和作用在设备标识404的用户操作。该第二用户操作用于开启第一电子设备的Wi-Fi模块、蓝牙模块中的一个或多个。In this embodiment of the present application, the second user operation may include a user operation performed on the speed sharing control 4021 and a user operation performed on the device identifier 404 on the user interface shown in FIG. 5C to FIG. 5D . The second user operation is used to turn on one or more of the Wi-Fi module and the Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
S104、响应于第二用户操作,第一电子设备10向第二电子设备20发送第一信息。该第一信息携带桌面布局信息和应用图标位置信息。该第一信息还可携带文件夹信息及文件夹所在位置信息。S104. In response to the second user operation, the first electronic device 10 sends the first information to the second electronic device 20. The first information carries desktop layout information and application icon location information. The first information may also carry folder information and folder location information.
本申请实施例中,第一信息可以是第一电子设备10通过可扩展的标记性语言(extensible markup language,XML)编码方式编码得到。第二电子设备20在接收到第一信息之后,通过XML解码可获得桌面布局和应用图标位置信息,还可获得文件夹信息。文件夹信息可包含文件夹名称、文件夹所包含的应用图标、文件夹在桌面所在的位置、文件夹中应用图标位置等信息。其中,桌面图标位置可包含导航栏中应用图标位置和非导航栏中应用图标位置。In this embodiment of the present application, the first information may be obtained by encoding the first electronic device 10 through an extensible markup language (extensible markup language, XML) encoding manner. After receiving the first information, the second electronic device 20 can obtain desktop layout and application icon location information through XML decoding, and can also obtain folder information. The folder information may include information such as the folder name, the application icon contained in the folder, the location of the folder on the desktop, and the location of the application icon in the folder. Wherein, the desktop icon position may include the position of the application icon in the navigation bar and the position of the application icon in the non-navigation bar.
举例说明,第一信息可包含:For example, the first information may include:
a.桌面布局取值为“4×6”; a. The desktop layout value is “4×6”;
b.应用图标1位置取值为“1行,1列”; b. The value of the 1 position of the application icon is "1 row, 1 column";
c.应用图标2位置取值为“1行,2列”; c. The value of the 2 position of the application icon is "1 row, 2 columns";
d.文件夹1的信息,包含名称取值为“购物”,文件夹1位置取值为“2行4列”,文件夹布局取值为“3×3”,文件夹包含应用图标为应用图标6和应用图标7,应用图标6位置取值为“1行,1列”。应用图标7位置取值为“1行,2列”。 d. The information of folder 1, including the name value is "Shopping", the position value of folder 1 is "2 rows and 4 columns", the folder layout value is "3 × 3", the folder containing the application icon is application Icon 6 and application icon 7, the position of application icon 6 is "1 row, 1 column". The value of the 7 position of the application icon is "1 row, 2 columns".
e.导航栏中应用图标3位置取值为“1行,1列”; e. The value of the 3 position of the application icon in the navigation bar is "1 row, 1 column";
f.导航栏中应用图标4位置取值为“1行,2列”; f. The value of the 4 position of the application icon in the navigation bar is "1 row, 2 columns";
g.导航栏中应用图标5位置取值为“1行,3列”。 g. The value of the 5 position of the application icon in the navigation bar is "1 row, 3 columns".
其中,b、c、e、f和g即为应用图标在桌面的位置。本申请实施例中,每个应用图标可通过应用图标的名称和图标的图案数据唯一标识。例如,多个记事本应用的应用名称相同,均为“记事本”。但是这多个记事本应用的图标图案不同,第一电子设备10可通过应用名称“记 事本”和应用的图标图案的数据标识该应用的图标。第二电子设备20也可通过应用名称和应用的图标的数据确定相同的应用的应用图标。Among them, b, c, e, f, and g are the positions of the application icons on the desktop. In this embodiment of the present application, each application icon may be uniquely identified by the name of the application icon and the pattern data of the icon. For example, multiple Notepad apps have the same app name as "Notepad". However, the icon patterns of these multiple notepad applications are different, and the first electronic device 10 can identify the icon of the application through the data of the application name "notepad" and the icon pattern of the application. The second electronic device 20 may also determine the application icon of the same application through the data of the application name and the application icon.
在本申请的一些实施例中,当第一电子设备10的桌面包含多个页面时,第一信息还可携带每个应用图标所在的页面的信息。In some embodiments of the present application, when the desktop of the first electronic device 10 includes multiple pages, the first information may further carry information of the page where each application icon is located.
在本申请的另一些实施例中,第一信息还可以是第一电子设备10通过JSON编码(jsonencode)方式得到。第二电子设备20在接收到第一信息之后,通过JSON解码可获得桌面布局和应用图标位置信息,还可获得文件夹信息。In other embodiments of the present application, the first information may also be obtained by the first electronic device 10 through JSON encoding (jsonencode). After receiving the first information, the second electronic device 20 can obtain desktop layout and application icon location information through JSON decoding, and can also obtain folder information.
S105、第二电子设备20按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。S105. The second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information.
在本申请的一些实施例中,第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置之前,还包括:第二电子设备显示第一用户界面,该第一用户界面包含第一控件和第一提示。所述第一提示指示接收到所述第一信息。之后,响应于作用在该第一控件的用户操作,该第二电子设备按照该第一信息重新设置第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在第二桌面的位置。In some embodiments of the present application, before the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, it further includes: the second electronic device displays the first A user interface, the first user interface includes a first control and a first prompt. The first prompt indicates that the first information is received. Afterwards, in response to the user operation acting on the first control, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop according to the first information.
其中,第一用户界面例如是图6C所示出的提示框502。其中第一提示例如是提示5021,第一控件例如是接受控件5023。The first user interface is, for example, the prompt box 502 shown in FIG. 6C . The first prompt is, for example, prompt 5021 , and the first control is, for example, accept control 5023 .
在本申请实施例中,第二电子设备按照第一信息重新设置第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在第二桌面的位置,包括:第二电子设备根据第一信息,将第一应用的图标设置在第二桌面的第一位置;其中,第一电子设备上第一应用的图标也在第一桌面的第一位置,第一应用为第一电子设备和第二电子设备均安装的应用。第二电子设备上第二应用被重新设置位置时在第二桌面上移动距离最小,第二应用为第一电子设备上有安装第二电子设备上未安装的应用。In the embodiment of the present application, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, including: the second electronic device, according to the first information, The icon is set in the first position of the second desktop; wherein, the icon of the first application on the first electronic device is also in the first position of the first desktop, and the first application is an application installed on both the first electronic device and the second electronic device . When the second application on the second electronic device is reset, the moving distance on the second desktop is the smallest, and the second application is installed on the first electronic device but not installed on the second electronic device.
示例性的,如图6D和图4所示,第一应用包含AI音箱的应用图标2021、图库的应用图标2022、设置的应用图标2023、华为穿戴的应用图标2024、浏览器的应用图标2025、邮箱的应用图标2026、音乐的应用图标2027、备忘录的应用图标2028、心脏健康研究的应用图标2029、应用商店的应用图标2020,为第一电子设备和第二电子设备均安装的应用。重新布局之后,在第二电子设备20的第二桌面上,AI音箱的应用图标2021位于第1行第2列,与第一电子设备10上AI音箱的应用图标1022的位置相同。即第一电子设备10上AI音箱的图标1022也位于第1行第2列。重新布局之后,在第二电子设备20的桌面上,图库的应用图标2022位于第3行第2列,与第一电子设备10上图库应用的图标1030的位置相同。重新布局之后,类似地,在第二电子设备20的桌面上,设置的应用图标2023、华为穿戴的应用图标2024、浏览器的应用图标2025、邮箱的应用图标2026、音乐的应用图标2027、备忘录的应用图标2028、心脏健康研究的应用图标2029、应用商店的应用图标2020与第一电子设备上相同应用图标的位置相同。Exemplarily, as shown in FIG. 6D and FIG. 4 , the first application includes the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker, the application icon 2022 of the gallery, the application icon 2023 of the settings, the application icon 2024 of the Huawei wear, the application icon 2025 of the browser, The mailbox application icon 2026 , the music application icon 2027 , the memo application icon 2028 , the heart health research application icon 2029 , and the application icon 2020 of the application store are applications installed on both the first electronic device and the second electronic device. After the rearrangement, on the second desktop of the second electronic device 20 , the application icon 2021 of the AI speaker is located in the first row and the second column, which is the same as the application icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 . That is, the icon 1022 of the AI speaker on the first electronic device 10 is also located in the first row and the second column. After the rearrangement, on the desktop of the second electronic device 20 , the application icon 2022 of the gallery is located in the third row and the second column, which is the same as the location of the icon 1030 of the gallery application on the first electronic device 10 . After the rearrangement, similarly, on the desktop of the second electronic device 20, the set application icon 2023, the Huawei wear application icon 2024, the browser application icon 2025, the mailbox application icon 2026, the music application icon 2027, the memo The application icon 2028 of , the application icon 2029 of the heart health research, and the application icon 2020 of the application store are in the same location as the same application icon on the first electronic device.
图18所描述的应用图标布局方法中,第二电子设备的桌面上应用图标,可按照第一电子设备上桌面布局和应用图标的位置进行桌面图标的布局。而用户对第一电子设备上各个应用的图标在该设备桌面所处的位置熟悉。在使用第二电子设备时,用户能够快速在第二电子设备桌面上找到应用的图标并打开,从而可以提高使用电子设备的便利性。In the application icon layout method described in FIG. 18 , the application icons on the desktop of the second electronic device can be arranged according to the desktop layout and the positions of the application icons on the first electronic device. On the other hand, the user is familiar with the positions where the icons of each application on the first electronic device are located on the desktop of the device. When using the second electronic device, the user can quickly find the icon of the application on the desktop of the second electronic device and open it, so that the convenience of using the electronic device can be improved.
本申请实施例中,重新布局后的第二桌面上,每个应用图标在第二桌面的位置与第一电子设备10上第一桌面该相同的应用图标的位置相同。In the embodiment of the present application, on the rearranged second desktop, the position of each application icon on the second desktop is the same as the position of the same application icon on the first desktop on the first electronic device 10 .
本申请实施例中,不限于蓝牙、Wi-Fi连接,第一电子设备10和第二电子设备20之间还 可通过NFC和移动通信网络传输第一信息。In the embodiment of the present application, not limited to Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connection, the first information can also be transmitted between the first electronic device 10 and the second electronic device 20 through NFC and a mobile communication network.
(1)NFC传输第一信息(1) NFC transmits the first information
该方法可包括:The method may include:
步骤一、第二电子设备显示第二桌面。 Step 1. The second electronic device displays the second desktop.
第二桌面例如是图6A所示出的用户界面、图12中的(A)所示出的用户界面、图14中的(A)所示出的用户界面、图15中的(A)所示出的用户界面、图16中的(A)所示出的用户界面和图17中的(A)所示出的用户界面。The second desktop is, for example, the user interface shown in FIG. 6A , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 12 , the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 14 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 15 . The user interface shown, the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 16 , and the user interface shown in (A) in FIG. 17 .
步骤二、第二电子设备接收用于开启近距离无线通信技术NFC模块的用户操作。Step 2: The second electronic device receives a user operation for turning on the NFC module of the short-range wireless communication technology.
用于开启近距离无线通信技术NFC模块的用户操作,例如是作用在图6B所示出的NFC开关503的用户操作。The user operation for turning on the NFC module of the short-range wireless communication technology is, for example, the user operation acting on the NFC switch 503 shown in FIG. 6B .
步骤三、第二电子设备通过NFC模块接收第一电子设备发送的第一信息,第一信息携带第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息。Step 3: The second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device through the NFC module. The first information carries the desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the location information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device.
步骤四、第二电子设备按照第一信息重新设置第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在第二桌面的位置。Step 4: The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
(2)移动通信网络传输第一信息(2) The mobile communication network transmits the first information
该方法可包括:The method may include:
步骤一、第二电子设备显示第二桌面。 Step 1. The second electronic device displays the second desktop.
步骤二、响应于第二电子设备登录第一账号,第二电子设备显示第二用户界面。Step 2: In response to the second electronic device logging in to the first account, the second electronic device displays a second user interface.
具体可参考图11A~图11C的用户界面所描述实施例,在本申请的一些实施例中,当第二电子设备20成功登陆该第一账号(例如华为账号)时,第二电子设备20可显示第二用户界面,该第二用户界面类比图11A所示第一电子设备10上的用户界面800。第二用户界面包含第二控件,例如是选项2。第二电子设备20也可接收作用在选项2的用户操作。响应于作用在选项2的用户操作,第二电子设备20可通过移动通信技术从第一电子设备接收第一信息。该第一信息携带第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息。之后,第二电子设备20可显示图11B所示出的提示框805。响应于作用在接受控件8053的用户操作,第二电子设备20按照第一信息指示的桌面布局和应用图标位置对所安装的应用图标在桌面上进行布局。For details, refer to the embodiments described in the user interfaces of FIGS. 11A to 11C . In some embodiments of the present application, when the second electronic device 20 successfully logs in to the first account (eg, a Huawei account), the second electronic device 20 can A second user interface is displayed, which is analogous to the user interface 800 on the first electronic device 10 shown in FIG. 11A . The second user interface contains a second control, eg option 2. The second electronic device 20 may also receive a user operation acting on option 2 . In response to the user operation acting on option 2, the second electronic device 20 may receive the first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology. The first information carries desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device. After that, the second electronic device 20 may display the prompt box 805 shown in FIG. 11B . In response to the user operation acting on the accept control 8053, the second electronic device 20 lays out the installed application icons on the desktop according to the desktop layout and the application icon positions indicated by the first information.
其中,第二电子设备第一电子设备也登陆有第一账号。Wherein, the second electronic device and the first electronic device are also logged in with the first account.
步骤三、响应于作用在第二控件的用户操作,第二电子设备通过移动通信技术从第一电子设备接收第一信息。Step 3: In response to a user operation acting on the second control, the second electronic device receives the first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology.
第一信息携带第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;The first information carries desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and position information of the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device;
步骤四、第二电子设备按照第一信息重新设置第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在第二桌面的位置。Step 4: The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机或处理器上运行时,使得计算机或处理器执行上述任一个方法中的一个或多个步骤。Embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, when the computer or the processor is run on the computer, the computer or the processor is made to execute any one of the above methods. or multiple steps.
本申请实施例还提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品。当该计算机程序产品在计算机或处理器上运行时,使得计算机或处理器执行上述任一个方法中的一个或多个步骤。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product including instructions. The computer program product, when run on a computer or processor, causes the computer or processor to perform one or more steps of any of the above methods.
在上述实施例中,全部或部分功能可以通过软件、硬件、或者软件加硬件的组合来实现。 当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如,固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, all or part of the functions may be implemented by software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. When implemented in software, it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated. The computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device. The computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, a data center, or the like that includes an integration of one or more available media. The usable media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, DVDs), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks (SSDs)), and the like.
以上所述,仅为本申请实施例的具体实施方式,但本申请实施例的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请实施例揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请实施例的保护范围之内。因此,本申请实施例的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above are only specific implementations of the embodiments of the present application, but the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application is not limited thereto, and any changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in the embodiments of the present application shall be covered by this within the protection scope of the application examples. Therefore, the protection scope of the embodiments of the present application should be subject to the protection scope of the claims.

Claims (16)

  1. 一种应用图标布局方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An application icon layout method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第一电子设备显示第一桌面,第二电子设备显示第二桌面;The first electronic device displays the first desktop, and the second electronic device displays the second desktop;
    所述第二电子设备接收第一用户操作;the second electronic device receives a first user operation;
    响应于所述第一用户操作,所述第二电子设备发送第一广播;In response to the first user operation, the second electronic device sends a first broadcast;
    所述第一电子设备接收第二用户操作;the first electronic device receives a second user operation;
    响应于所述第二用户操作,所述第一电子设备通过所述第一广播发现所述第二电子设备,并向所述第二电子设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息携带所述第一桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在所述第一桌面的位置信息;In response to the second user operation, the first electronic device discovers the second electronic device through the first broadcast, and sends first information to the second electronic device; wherein the first information carries Desktop layout information of the first desktop and location information of application icons on the first desktop;
    所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置。The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  2. 一种应用图标布局方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An application icon layout method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第二电子设备显示第二桌面;The second electronic device displays the second desktop;
    所述第二电子设备接收第一用户操作;the second electronic device receives a first user operation;
    响应于所述第一用户操作,所述第二电子设备发送第一广播;所述第一广播用于所述第一电子设备发现所述第二电子设备;In response to the first user operation, the second electronic device sends a first broadcast; the first broadcast is used by the first electronic device to discover the second electronic device;
    所述第二电子设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息携带所述第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在所述第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;The second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device, and the first information carries the desktop layout information of the desktop of the first electronic device and the application icon on the desktop of the first electronic device. location information;
    所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置。The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一广播为蓝牙广播或者无线保真Wi-Fi广播,所述第一信息通过无线局域网WLAN直连或者蓝牙连接由第一电子设备发送给第二电子设备。The method of claim 2, wherein the first broadcast is a Bluetooth broadcast or a Wi-Fi broadcast, and the first information is sent by the first electronic device through a wireless local area network (WLAN) direct connection or a Bluetooth connection to the second electronic device.
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一用户操作为开启所述第二电子设备的蓝牙开关的用户操作或者开启所述第二电子设备的Wi-Fi开关的用户操作;The method of claim 3, wherein the first user operation is a user operation of turning on a Bluetooth switch of the second electronic device or a user operation of turning on a Wi-Fi switch of the second electronic device;
    所述第二用户操作用于开启所述第一电子设备的Wi-Fi模块、蓝牙模块中的一个或多个。The second user operation is used to turn on one or more of the Wi-Fi module and the Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
  5. 如权利要求2至4任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二电子设备接收所述第一电子设备发送的第一信息之后,所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置之前,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 4, characterized in that, after the second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device, the second electronic device executes the first information according to the first information. Before resetting the desktop layout of the second desktop and setting the position of the application icon on the second desktop, the method further includes:
    所述第二电子设备显示第一用户界面,所述第一用户界面包含第一控件和第一提示;所述第一提示指示接收到所述第一信息;the second electronic device displays a first user interface, the first user interface includes a first control and a first prompt; the first prompt indicates that the first information is received;
    所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置,包括:The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop, including:
    响应于作用在所述第一控件的用户操作,所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置。In response to the user operation acting on the first control, the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  6. 如权利要求2至5任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二电子设备按照所述第一 信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置,包括:The method according to any one of claims 2 to 5, wherein the second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets application icons on the second desktop location, including:
    所述第二电子设备根据所述第一信息,将所述第一应用的图标设置在所述第二桌面的第一位置;The second electronic device sets the icon of the first application on the first position of the second desktop according to the first information;
    其中,所述第一电子设备上所述第一应用的图标也在所述第一桌面的所述第一位置,所述第一应用为所述第一电子设备和所述第二电子设备均安装的应用;Wherein, the icon of the first application on the first electronic device is also in the first position of the first desktop, and the first application is both the first electronic device and the second electronic device installed applications;
    所述第二电子设备上第二应用被重新设置位置时在所述第二桌面上移动距离最小,所述第二应用为所述第一电子设备上有安装但所述第二电子设备上未安装的应用。When the second application on the second electronic device is reset, the movement distance on the second desktop is the smallest, and the second application is installed on the first electronic device but not on the second electronic device. installed applications.
  7. 如权利要求2至6任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 2 to 6, wherein,
    所述第一信息还携带文件夹信息,所述文件夹信息包含第一文件夹在所述第一桌面上的位置、所述第一文件夹包含第一图标和第二图标、所述第一图标在所述第一文件夹中的位置和所述第二图标在所述第一文件夹中的位置。The first information also carries folder information, the folder information includes the location of the first folder on the first desktop, the first folder includes a first icon and a second icon, the first The location of the icon in the first folder and the location of the second icon in the first folder.
  8. 一种应用图标布局方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An application icon layout method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第一电子设备显示第一桌面;the first electronic device displays the first desktop;
    所述第一电子设备接收第二用户操作;the first electronic device receives a second user operation;
    响应于所述第二用户操作,所述第一电子设备发现所述第二电子设备,并向所述第二电子设备发送第一信息;其中,所述第一信息携带所述第一桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在所述第一桌面的位置信息;In response to the second user operation, the first electronic device discovers the second electronic device, and sends first information to the second electronic device; wherein the first information carries the information of the first desktop. Desktop layout information and location information of application icons on the first desktop;
    所述第一信息用于所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二电子设备的桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二电子设备的桌面的位置。The first information is used for the second electronic device to reset the desktop layout of the desktop of the second electronic device according to the first information and to set the position of the application icon on the desktop of the second electronic device.
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息通过无线局域网WLAN直连或者蓝牙连接由第一电子设备发送给第二电子设备。The method of claim 8, wherein the first information is sent from the first electronic device to the second electronic device through a wireless local area network (WLAN) direct connection or a Bluetooth connection.
  10. 如权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二用户操作用于开启所述第一电子设备的Wi-Fi模块、蓝牙模块中的一个或多个。The method of claim 9, wherein the second user operation is used to turn on one or more of a Wi-Fi module and a Bluetooth module of the first electronic device.
  11. 一种应用图标布局方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An application icon layout method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    第二电子设备显示第二桌面;The second electronic device displays the second desktop;
    所述第二电子设备接收用于开启近距离无线通信技术NFC模块的用户操作;The second electronic device receives a user operation for turning on the NFC module of the short-range wireless communication technology;
    所述第二电子设备通过所述NFC模块接收所述第一电子设备发送的第一信息,所述第一信息携带所述第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在所述第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;The second electronic device receives the first information sent by the first electronic device through the NFC module, and the first information carries the desktop layout information and application icons of the desktop of the first electronic device in the first electronic device. location information of the desktop of the electronic device;
    所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置。The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  12. 一种应用图标布局方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:An application icon layout method, characterized in that the method comprises:
    所述第二电子设备显示第二桌面;the second electronic device displays a second desktop;
    响应于所述第二电子设备登录第一账号,所述第二电子设备显示第二用户界面;In response to the second electronic device logging into the first account, the second electronic device displays a second user interface;
    其中,所述第二电子设备第一电子设备也登陆有所述第一账号;所述第二用户界面包含 第二控件;Wherein, the first electronic device of the second electronic device is also logged in with the first account; the second user interface includes a second control;
    响应于作用在所述第二控件的用户操作,所述第二电子设备通过移动通信技术从所述第一电子设备接收第一信息,所述第一信息携带所述第一电子设备的桌面的桌面布局信息和应用图标在所述第一电子设备的桌面的位置信息;In response to a user operation acting on the second control, the second electronic device receives first information from the first electronic device through a mobile communication technology, the first information carrying the information of the desktop of the first electronic device. desktop layout information and location information of application icons on the desktop of the first electronic device;
    所述第二电子设备按照所述第一信息重新设置所述第二桌面的桌面布局并设置应用图标在所述第二桌面的位置。The second electronic device resets the desktop layout of the second desktop according to the first information and sets the position of the application icon on the second desktop.
  13. 一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第二电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块;An electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a second electronic device, wherein the electronic device comprises: one or more processors, a memory, a Bluetooth module and a Wi-Fi module;
    所述蓝牙模块和所述Wi-Fi模块,用于发送第一广播,并与第一电子设备建立蓝牙连接或者Wi-Fi连接;The Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module are used to send the first broadcast and establish a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection with the first electronic device;
    所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory for storing computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions;
    当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求2至7中任一项所述的应用图标布局方法。When the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device is caused to perform the application icon layout method as claimed in any one of claims 2 to 7.
  14. 一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第一电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、蓝牙模块和Wi-Fi模块;An electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a first electronic device, wherein the electronic device comprises: one or more processors, a memory, a Bluetooth module and a Wi-Fi module;
    所述蓝牙模块和所述Wi-Fi模块,用于通过第一广播发现第二电子设备,并与第二电子设备建立蓝牙连接或者Wi-Fi连接;The Bluetooth module and the Wi-Fi module are used to discover the second electronic device through the first broadcast, and establish a Bluetooth connection or a Wi-Fi connection with the second electronic device;
    所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory for storing computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions;
    当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求8至10中任一项所述的应用图标布局方法。When the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device is caused to perform the application icon layout method according to any one of claims 8 to 10.
  15. 一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第二电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、NFC模块;An electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a second electronic device, wherein the electronic device comprises: one or more processors, a memory, and an NFC module;
    所述NFC模块,用于接收第一电子设备发送的第一信息;the NFC module for receiving the first information sent by the first electronic device;
    所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory for storing computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions;
    当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求11所述的应用图标布局方法。When the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device is caused to perform the application icon layout method of claim 11 .
  16. 一种电子设备,所述电子设备为第二电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括:一个或多个处理器、存储器、移动通信模块;An electronic device, wherein the electronic device is a second electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device comprises: one or more processors, a memory, and a mobile communication module;
    所述移动通信模块,用于接收第一电子设备发送的第一信息;the mobile communication module, configured to receive the first information sent by the first electronic device;
    所述存储器与所述一个或多个处理器耦合,所述存储器用于存储计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码包括计算机指令;the memory is coupled to the one or more processors, the memory for storing computer program code, the computer program code comprising computer instructions;
    当所述一个或多个处理器执行所述计算机指令时,使得所述电子设备执行如权利要求12所述的应用图标布局方法。When the one or more processors execute the computer instructions, the electronic device is caused to perform the application icon layout method of claim 12 .
PCT/CN2021/109524 2020-07-30 2021-07-30 Application icon layout method and related apparatus WO2022022674A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010753568.6 2020-07-30
CN202010753568.6A CN114064160A (en) 2020-07-30 2020-07-30 Application icon layout method and related device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022022674A1 true WO2022022674A1 (en) 2022-02-03

Family

ID=80037675

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/109524 WO2022022674A1 (en) 2020-07-30 2021-07-30 Application icon layout method and related apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN114064160A (en)
WO (1) WO2022022674A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116048682A (en) * 2022-08-02 2023-05-02 荣耀终端有限公司 Terminal system interface layout comparison method and electronic equipment

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN117111965B (en) * 2023-03-21 2024-08-13 荣耀终端有限公司 Application program installation method, electronic device and readable storage medium

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101789955A (en) * 2009-12-25 2010-07-28 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Desktop sharing control method, device and mobile terminal
US20110246894A1 (en) * 2010-04-06 2011-10-06 Asustek Computer Inc. File sharing method and system
CN103235685A (en) * 2013-03-28 2013-08-07 北京小米科技有限责任公司 Method and device for setting desktop content of terminal operating system
CN106293356A (en) * 2016-07-29 2017-01-04 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of desktop layouts is changed planes method and system
CN106547427A (en) * 2016-10-26 2017-03-29 北京奇虎科技有限公司 A kind of method of adjustment and device of desktop layouts
CN106648578A (en) * 2016-09-09 2017-05-10 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Desktop layout sharing method, sending terminal and receiving terminal
CN109358940A (en) * 2018-10-31 2019-02-19 努比亚技术有限公司 Desktop synchronization, mobile terminal and computer readable storage medium

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN106095228A (en) * 2016-06-02 2016-11-09 联想(北京)有限公司 A kind of information processing method and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101789955A (en) * 2009-12-25 2010-07-28 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 Desktop sharing control method, device and mobile terminal
US20110246894A1 (en) * 2010-04-06 2011-10-06 Asustek Computer Inc. File sharing method and system
CN103235685A (en) * 2013-03-28 2013-08-07 北京小米科技有限责任公司 Method and device for setting desktop content of terminal operating system
CN106293356A (en) * 2016-07-29 2017-01-04 宇龙计算机通信科技(深圳)有限公司 A kind of desktop layouts is changed planes method and system
CN106648578A (en) * 2016-09-09 2017-05-10 深圳市金立通信设备有限公司 Desktop layout sharing method, sending terminal and receiving terminal
CN106547427A (en) * 2016-10-26 2017-03-29 北京奇虎科技有限公司 A kind of method of adjustment and device of desktop layouts
CN109358940A (en) * 2018-10-31 2019-02-19 努比亚技术有限公司 Desktop synchronization, mobile terminal and computer readable storage medium

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN116048682A (en) * 2022-08-02 2023-05-02 荣耀终端有限公司 Terminal system interface layout comparison method and electronic equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN114064160A (en) 2022-02-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021013158A1 (en) Display method and related apparatus
WO2020259452A1 (en) Full-screen display method for mobile terminal, and apparatus
CN109814766B (en) Application display method and electronic equipment
WO2021213164A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2020134869A1 (en) Electronic device operating method and electronic device
WO2021000804A1 (en) Display method and apparatus in locked state
WO2021036770A1 (en) Split-screen processing method and terminal device
WO2019072178A1 (en) Method for processing notification, and electronic device
JP7268275B2 (en) Method and electronic device for presenting video on electronic device when there is an incoming call
WO2022017393A1 (en) Display interaction system, display method, and device
WO2022022575A1 (en) Display control method and apparatus, and storage medium
WO2022068819A1 (en) Interface display method and related apparatus
WO2021052204A1 (en) Address book-based device discovery method, audio and video communication method, and electronic device
WO2022042770A1 (en) Method for controlling communication service state, terminal device and readable storage medium
WO2022179275A1 (en) Terminal application control method, terminal device, and chip system
WO2020155875A1 (en) Display method for electronic device, graphic user interface and electronic device
WO2022161119A1 (en) Display method and electronic device
WO2022022674A1 (en) Application icon layout method and related apparatus
WO2020192716A1 (en) System language switching method and related apparatus
CN115016697A (en) Screen projection method, computer device, readable storage medium, and program product
WO2022166435A1 (en) Picture sharing method and electronic device
EP4228233A1 (en) Method for adding operation sequence, electronic device, and system
WO2022135195A1 (en) Method and apparatus for displaying virtual reality interface, device, and readable storage medium
WO2022078116A1 (en) Brush effect picture generation method, image editing method and device, and storage medium
CN112286596A (en) Message display method and electronic equipment

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21849330

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21849330

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1